You are on page 1of 321

Baker Hughes INTEQ

MPR
(Probe & Collar Based)

User’s Guide

P/N N750-500-043 Rev. D December 1999

Confidential

Technical Communications Group


P.O. Box 670968
Houston, TX 77267-0968
USA
713-625-4694
This manual is provided without any warranty of any kind,
either expressed or implied. The information in this document
is believed to be accurate. However, Baker Hughes INTEQ
will not be liable for any damages, whether direct or indirect,
which result from the use of any information contained
herein.

© 1999 Baker Hughes Incorporated. All rights reserved.


Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Chapter 1
Introduction to MPR
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
MPR Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
3-1/8" Tool Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
4-3/4" Tool Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
6-3/4" Tool Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
8-1/4" Tool Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Resistivity Sensor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

Chapter 2
Initial Setup
Probe Based System
Tool Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Required Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
3-1/8" USMPR Lengths & Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Calculating the ESB Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Spacing Calculation Using NaviTrak Pulser . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Sensor Offset Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
4-3/4" MPR Sensor Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Minimum Required Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Spacing Calculations Using the Universal Pulser . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Sensor Offset Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Battery Life Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Modified Tandem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Modified Tandem Versus SDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Battery Operating Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Salt Saturated Muds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Hydraulic Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

User’s Guide i
N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Table of Contents

Chapter 3
Navi-MPR Communications
& Setup
Dump Port O-ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Programming the SDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Chapter 4
Navi-MPR Catwalk Test
Communicating with SDAS, SGAM, & Navi-MPR . . . . . . . . 4-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Probe Tool Communications with PowerComms . . . . . . . 4-5
Revised Operational Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Catwalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Chapter 5
Navi-MPR Verification Procedures
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Crane Hang Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Rig Floor Verification Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Summary of Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Prior to Air Hang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Chapter 6
Navi-MPR Tool Installation
Picking-up the 4-3/4" Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Picking-up the 3-1/8" Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Rig Floor Makeup for Memory-only Tool . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Modified Rig Floor Makeup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Orienting to the Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Laying out the Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

ii Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Table of Contents

Chapter 7
Memory Only Services
Logging with Memory Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Logging While Tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Chapter 8
Quick Reference to Modular MPR
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Required Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Quick Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
In the Crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Surface System Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
DSeries Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
SUITing the Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Sensor to Bit Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Picking-up the Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Modular Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Rig Floor Verification Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Summary of Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Detailed Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Turnaround Between Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
SUITing the Collar Based MPR Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Example of DrillByte/MSS MPR SUIT Configuration . . 8-17

Appendix A
Dual Battery Operations
Dual PDM (DPDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

Appendix B
Quick Reference Guide
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

User’s Guide iii


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Table of Contents

Appendix C
Navi-MPR Busmon Example
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Tool Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
NT BusMon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10

Appendix D
Communications with MPRTEST
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2

Appendix E
Male Stab Connector Procedure
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-1

Appendix F
Relog Data Sheet
General Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-4
Formation/Reservoir Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-4
Log Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-4
Drilling Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-4

Appendix G
DSeries Processing & BHA Data Inputs
Failed Transmitter Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4
Raw Data Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4
Failed Receiver Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-10
Raw Data Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-10
Rig Failure Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-10
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-10

Appendix H
UP & UP/UPU Rigsite Procedures
Maintenance Procedures when Tripping
In/Out of the Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
UP & UP/UPU System Retrieval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2

iv Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Table of Contents

Main Valve Assembly (MVA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-6


MVA Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-6
Restrictor Carrier Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-8
MVA Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-11
CVA Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-13

Appendix I
MPR/RNT Test Software

Index

User’s Guide v
N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999Confidential
Chapter 1
Introduction to MPR

Chapter 1 is an introduction to the MPR


tool along with pertinent tool
specifications.

Background
For several years Baker Hughes INTEQ has supplied a
Formation Evaluation service employing the propagation
of a 2 MHz electromagnetic wave to provide resistivity
measurements. Tools which use electromagnetic wave
propagation to make resistivity measurements work with
all types of drilling fluids and in any formation. The first
propagation resistivity tool used by Baker Hughes INTEQ
was known as the Dual Propagation Resistivity tool, which
provides two measurements; Phase Difference or PD and
Attenuation or AT (also known as amplitude ratio or AR)
at a frequency of 2 MHz. Phase Difference is the slowing
down of an electromagnetic wave as it propagates through
a conductive media. Likewise, Attenuation is the reduction
in signal strength as the wave propagates through a
conductive media.
DPR tools require a temperature characterization of each
sensor prior to deployment. This is because drifts in the
measurements caused by temperature physically affecting
the tool electronically and mechanically must be
compensated for in order to obtain accurate readings.
Drifts are also caused by pressure changes, but there is no
current calibration for these effects. Temperature

User’s Guide 1-1


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

characterization involves heating up the sub, then allowing


it to cool while measuring the resultant changes in PD and
AT. These changes are stored as correction factors and
removed during data processing. Characterizing a tool for
temperature is time consuming and expensive. The
heating/cooling cycle must be carried out several times in
order to achieve statistical repeatability. Even after PD and
AT temperature characterizations are obtained their
accuracy may be questioned due to statistical variation.
Once temperature related drifts are removed, formation
conductivity is the major factor affecting the PD and AT.
Secondly, the mechanical construction of the DPR sub,
with antennas protected by fiberglass clam shells involves
rework and recalibration. From a design viewpoint, the
DPR sub is currently incompatible with the “modular”
concept which means that an additional sub is required to
allow the DPR tool to work with higher level services.
Lastly, with the concurrent development of
electromagnetic resistivity tools throughout the industry,
the next advancement is the provision of more than two
DPR style resistivity measurements. This has been
achieved with the Multiple Propagation Resistivity tool.
Multiple measurements provide high quality petrophysical
logs to assist in keeping the well trajectory within well
defined and tight constraints or to make sophisticated
geological or geophysical interpretation of the data
possible.
The design aims of the MPR include the following:
• It is a compensated measurement meaning that there
are no requirements for expensive temperature
characterizations. A more accurate measurement is
obtained since there is no dependency on statistical
variation.
• The sensors, i.e., transmitting and receiving
antennas are extremely robust, so less rework is
required.

1-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

• It provides more than two separate resistivity


measurements, i.e., 2 MHz PD and AT. These
resistivity measurements have differing radial and
vertical Geometric Factors, meaning they will have
different Depths of Investigation (DOI) and
Vertical Resolution.

MPR Overview
The MPR (Multiple Propagation Resistivity) tool is a new
introduction into the FEMWD market. It consists of a two
frequency (2 MHz and 400 kHz), four transmitters/two
receiver system.
This new technology offers considerable enhancements
over the standard 2 MHz DPR system. Measurements are
made with two frequencies and two different transmitter
spacings giving a total of eight depths of investigation. In
addition, due to the design of the tool, these measurements
are compensated (where two measurements made at the
same frequency and transmitter spacings but from
different transmitters are added together and averaged).
Compensation is a significant enhancement over the DPR
system in that it eliminates error caused by drift of the
receiver antennas through changes in temperature and
pressure. The second frequency, 400 kHz, was added to
help remove dielectric effects as well as increase depth of
investigation. In addition, digital electronics provide
increased accuracy and dynamic range of the
measurements compared to the DPR’s analog circuitry.
Thirty-two raw amplitude and phase measurements can be
made with varying depths of investigation. This will make
it possible to determine many borehole/near borehole
characteristics like Rmud, Rxo, hole size and eccentricity.
The 400 kHz frequency has a greater depth of investigation
than the 2 MHz and is particularly useful in horizontal
logging. See Figure 1-1.

User’s Guide 1-3


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Upper
Transmitters

Receivers

Lower
Transmitters

Figure 1-1 MPR Sub


The MPR Sub consists of two frequencies (2 MHz and 400 kHz),
four transmitters and two receivers.

Also, see Figure 1-2, Figure 1-3, and Figure 1-4.

1-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Figure 1-2 3-1/8" USMPR™ Tool


This diagram shows the major components of the 3-1/8 inch
USMPR tool.

User’s Guide 1-5


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Figure 1-3 4-3/4 inch MPR™ Tool


This diagram shows the major components of the 4-3/4 inch
MPR tool.

1-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Figure 1-4 6-3/4 inch MPR™ Tool


This diagram shows the major components for the 6-3/4 inch
MPR tool.

User’s Guide 1-7


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

3-1/8" Tool Specifications

Table 1-1 General Tool Specifications

Tool OD 3-1/8"
Length 7.4 ft
Hole Sizes 3-3/4" to 5-7/8" (216-251 mm)
Weight USMPR 175 lb. (79 kg)
Connections 3" CDP Box Uphole
3" CDP Pin Downhole
Dogleg Severity (BUR) Max. Rotating (°/100 ft) 20
Max. Sliding (°/100 ft) 45
Max. OXP (°/100 ft) 35
Temperature Operating: 150°C (302°F)
Pressure 20,000 psi (1,379 bar)
Mud Flow Range 80-160 gpm (300-600 lpm)
Lost Circulation Material Fine to Medium (15 lbs/bbl)
Pulsation Dampner 1/3 Standpipe Pressure
Data Acquisition Mud pulse telemetry to surface
and downhole memory
Telemetry Type Positive pulse

1-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Table 1-2 Gamma Ray Specifications

Sensor Type Scintillation


Measurement API GR
Real-Time Yes
Recorded Yes
Range 0-250 API
Accuracy ± 3% of full scale
Statistical Repeatability ± 3 API @ 100 API @
ROP= 60 ft/hr (18.3 m/hr)
Vertical Resolution 6" (153 mm)

Table 1-3 Propagation Resistivity Specifications

2 MHz Resistivity
Phase Difference Range: 0.1-3,000 ohm-m
(Long Spaced) Accuracy: ± 1% (0.1-50 ohm-m)
± 0.5 mmho/m (>50 ohm-m)
Attenuation Range: 0.1-500 ohm-m
(Long Spaced) Accuracy: ± 2% (0.1-50 ohm-m)
± 1.0 mmho/m (>50 ohm-m)
Vertical Resolution:
8" (20 cm) for 90% response in
conductive beds.
400 kHz Resistivity
Phase Difference Range: 0.1-1,000 ohm-m
(Long Spaced) Accuracy: ± 1% (0.1-25 ohm-m)
± 1.0 mmho/m (25 ohm-m)

User’s Guide 1-9


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Table 1-3 Propagation Resistivity Specifications

Attenuation Range: 0.1-200 ohm-m


Accuracy: ± 5% (0.1-10 ohm-m)
± 5.0 mmho/m (>10 ohm-m)
Vertical Resolution:
12" (30 cm) for 90% response in
conductive beds.

Table 1-4 Directional Measurement Specifications

Measurement Range Resolution Accuracy

Inclination 0° - 180° 0.1 ± 0.2


Azimuth1, 2 0° - 360° 0.35 ± 1.0
Toolface
Magnetic1 0° - 360° 1.4 ± 1.5
Gravity 2 0° - 360° 1.4 ± 1.5
Temperature (C) -20° - 150° 2 ± 4.0
Dip Angle1 -90° - 90° 0.05 ± 0.3
MTF/GTF Operator Selectable (default set at 5°)
Switching
Inclination Degrees:

1 Assumes typical magnetic field values at 30° latitude.


2
Accuracy applies to inclinations greater than 5.0°.

1-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

4-3/4" Tool Specifications

Table 1-5 General Tool Specifications

Tool OD 4-3/4 in. (nominal), 5 in.


(antennas),
5-1/4 in. (spiral wear bands)
Length MPR Sub - 12 ft (3.7 m)
Navi-MPR Tool - 58 ft (17.8 m)
Hole Sizes 5-7/8 to 6-3/4 inch
(150 to 172 mm)
Weight MPR Sub & Sonde -
600 lb. (272 kg)
Navi-MPR System -
3,050 lb. (1,383 kg)
Equivalent Stiffness OD x ID 4.597 inch x 2.250 inch
(11.676 cm x 5.715 cm) (11.676 cm x 5.715 cm)
Optional Mandrel Stabilizer 5-1/4 in. mandrel with slick,
5-7/8 in. or 6-1/8 in. sleeve
(five straight blades)
Connections 3-1/2 in. I.F. box up and
3-1/2 in. I.F. box down
Dogleg Severity Max Rotating (°/100 ft) 12
Max Sliding (°/100 ft) 30
Temperature Operating: 302°F (150°C)
Survival: 347°F (175°C)
Pressure 20,000 psi (1,378 bar)
Mud Flow Range 100-350 gpm (380 -1,325 lpm)
Lost Circulation Material Fine to medium nut plug
Pulsation Dampner Recommended, charge by 30%

User’s Guide 1-11


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Table 1-5 General Tool Specifications

Data Acquisition Mud pulse telemetry to surface


and downhole memory
Telemetry Type Positive Pulse

Note: When 4-3/4 inch systems are run in larger


hole sizes than 6-3/4 inch (i.e., 7.5 inch), be
aware of the increased possibility of
eccentricity effects occurring as well as the
consequence on borehole corrected
resistivities when the contrast between the
formation and the mud resistivity is high.

Table 1-6 Operating Specifications

Mud Filter (Uphole) Supplied to fit 3-1/2 in. I.F.


(8.9 cm) drillpipe after pipe
Retrievable basket
Mud Pumps Either duplex or triplex
Sand Content 1% maximum volume
recommended
RPM No restrictions
Pressure Drop Pressure drop dependent upon
mud weight, flow rate, MWD
tool valve gap, and data
transmission rate.
∆P at Bit No restrictions
Tool Face Update Rate 11, 24, or 35 seconds
Full Survey Transmission 55 seconds from Pumps-On

1-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Table 1-7 Directional Sensor Measurement


Specifications

Measurement Range Resolution Accuracy*

Inclination 0° - 180.0° 0.1 ± 0.2


Azimuth1,2 0° -360.0° 0.35 ± 1.0
Toolface:
Magnetic1 0° -360° 1.4 ± 1.5
Gravity2 0° -360° 1.4 ± 1.5
Temperature 0° - 150°C 2.0 ± 2.0
Total Magnetic 0 - 70,000 100 ± 200
Field gamma
Dip Angle1 -90° to 90° 0.1 ± 0.3
Gravity 0 - 1,800 mg 1.0 ± 2.0
Magnitude
MTF/GTF Switching
inclination degrees: Operator Selectable (default set at 3°).
Operating Range: 2-180°
Downhole End to Directional Sensor: 24.5 ft (7.5 m)

* All sensor accuracies are 2 Sigma confidence.


1
Assumes typical magnetic field values at 30° latitude.
2Accuracy applies to inclinations greater than 5.0°.

User’s Guide 1-13


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Table 1-8 Near Bit Inclination Sensor Specifications

Sensor Type accelerometer


Range 0 - 180°
Accuracy ± 0.5° @ Inc. > 30°
Real-time while sliding Yes
Real-time while rotating Yes
Memory Stored Yes
Downhole End to Inclination 5.4 ft (1.6 m)
Sensor

Table 1-9 Gamma Ray Sensor Specifications

Sensor Type Scintillation


Measurement API GR
Real-time Yes
Recorded Yes
Range 0 to 250 API
Accuracy ± 3% API of full scale
Statistical Repeatability ± 3 API @ 100 API and
ROP = 60 ft/hr (18.3 m/hr)
Vertical Resolution 6 in. (15.3 cm)
Downhole End to Gamma 3.6 ft (1.1 m)
Sensor 11" from base of Bull Plug

1-14 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Table 1-10 Approximate Tool Lengths (Non-I.S. Tool


with SRIG Sensor in the Lower Flex Joint

Flow Sub 9.67 ft (box connection up)


(4-3/4 in. OD)
Monel Collar 30 ft Customer supplied so
(4-3/4 in. OD) length will vary.
Supplied by BHI
23.9 ft
(4-3/4 in. OD)
Upper Flex 5.80 ft Necks down to 4 in.
Joint (4-3/4 in. x 4 in.
OD)
Non-I.S. MPR 12.0 ft 5-1/4 in. wear bands
Sub (4-3/4 in. OD)
Lower Flex 5.80 ft Necks down to 4 in.
Joint (4-3/4 in. x 4 in. (box connection down)
OD)

User’s Guide 1-15


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

6-3/4" Tool Specifications


Table 1-11 General Tool Specifications

Tool OD 6-3/4 in. (nominal), with


7 in. spiral wear bands
Length MPR Sub: 12 ft (3.7 m)
MPR Toolstring: 55 ft (16.8 m)
Hole Sizes 8-1/2 in. to 9-7/8 in.
(216 to 251 mm)
Weight MPR Sub & Sonde: 1,280 lb
(581 kg)
MPR Toolstring: 4,200 lb
(1,950 kg)
Equivalent Stiffness 6.625 in. x 2.810 in.
OD x ID (16.82 cm x 7.14 cm)
Connections 4-1/2 in. I.F. box up and 4-1/2
in. I.F. box down
Dogleg Severity Max. Rotating (°/100 ft) 9
Max. Sliding (°/100 ft) 16
Temperature 257°F (125°C)
Specially prepared equipment
for up to 302°F (150°C)
Operation
Pressure 20,000 psi (1,378 bar)
Mud Flow Range 200 - 800 gpm
(760 - 3,030 lpm)
Lost Circulation Material Fine to medium nut plug
Pulsation Dampner Recommended, charge to 30%
Data Acquisition Mud pulse telemetry to surface
and downhole memory

1-16 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Table 1-11 General Tool Specifications

Telemetry Type Positive pulse

Table 1-12 Operating Specifications

Mud Filter (Uphole) Supplied to fit 4-1/2 in. I.F.


(11.4 cm) I.F. and XH, and 5
in. (12.7 cm) XH tool joints.
Retrievable plug
Mud Pumps Either duplex or triplex
Sand Content 1% maximum volume
recommended
Downhole RPM ± 80% maximum deviation
from the mean Operating rpm
(e.g., 100 rpm: Operation
Range = 20-180)
Surface RPM No restrictions
Axial and Lateral Shocks 10g rms (either as flagged by
the real-time severity level or
from recorded memory data)
Pressure Drop Pressure drop dependent upon
mud weight, flow rate, MWD
tool valve gap, and data
transmission rate
∆P at Bit No restrictions
Tool Face Update Rate 11, 24, or 35 seconds
Full Survey Transmission 55 seconds from pumps-on

User’s Guide 1-17


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Table 1-13 Gamma Ray Sensor Specifications

Sensor Type Scintillation


Measurement API GR
Real-time Yes
Recorded Yes
Range 0 to 250 API
Accuracy ± 3% API of full scale
Statistical Repeatability ± 3 API @ 100 API and
ROP = 60 ft/hr (18.3 m/hr)
Vertical Resolution 6 in. (15.3 cm)
Downhole End to Gamma 2.5 ft (0.8 m)
Sensor 11" from base of Bull Plug

1-18 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Table 1-14 Directional Sensor Measurement


Specifications

Measurement Range Resolution Accuracy*

Inclination 0° - 180.0° 0.1 ± 0.2


Azimuth1,2 0° - 360.0° 0.35 ± 1.0
Toolface:
Magnetic1 0° - 360° 1.4 ± 1.0
Gravity2 0° - 360° 1.4 ± 1.5
Temperature 0° - 150°C 1.1 ± 2.0
Total Magnetic 30,000 - 100 ± 200
Field 66,000
gamma
Dip Angle1 -90° - 90° 0.05 ± 0.3
MTF/GTF Switching, Operator Selectable (default set at 5°)
Inclination Degrees
Downhole End to Directional Sensor: 26.7 ft (8.1 m)

* All sensor accuracies are 2 Sigma confidence.


1 Assumes typical magnetic field values at 30° latitude.
2
Accuracy applies to inclinations greater than 5.0°.

User’s Guide 1-19


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

8-1/4" Tool Specifications

Table 1-15 General Tool Specifications

Tool OD 8-1/4 in. (nominal) with 8-1/2 in.


spiral wear bands
Length MPR Sub: 12 ft (3.7 m)
MPR Toolstring: 52 ft (15.8 m)
Hole Sizes 12-1/4 in. (311 mm)
Weight MPR Sub & Sonde: 1,595 lb. (725 kg)
MPR Toolstring: 4,200 lb (1,950 kg)
Equivalent Stiffness 8.23 in. x 4.005 in.
OD x ID (20.90 cm x 10.17 cm)
Connections 6-5/8 in. Reg box up and 6-5/8 in. Reg
box down
Dogleg Severity Max Rotating (°/100 ft) 8.2
Max Sliding (°/100 ft) 8.2
Temperature 257°F (125°C)
Specially prepared equipment
required for up to 302°F (150°C)
Operation
Pressure 20,000 psi (1,378 bar)
Mud Flow Range 300-1,100 gpm (1,135 - 4,165 lpm)
Lost Circulation Fine to medium nut plug
Material
Pulsation Dampner Recommended, Charge at 30%
Data Acquisition Mud pulse telemetry to surface and
downhole memory
Telemetry Type Positive pulse

1-20 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Table 1-16 Operating Specifications

Mud Filter (Uphole) Supplied to fit 4-1/2 in. I.F.


(11.4 cm) and XH, and 5 in.
(12.7 cm) XH tool joints
Retrievable plug
Mud Pumps Either duplex or triplex
Sand Content 1% maximum volume
recommended
Downhole RPM ± 80% maximum deviation
from the mean Operating rpm
(e.g., 100 rpm: Operation
Range = 20-180)
Surface RPM No restrictions
Axial and Lateral Shocks 10g rms (either as flagged by
the real-time severity level or
from recorded memory data)
Pressure Drop Pressure drop dependent upon
mud weight, flow rate, MWD
tool valve gap, and data
transmission rate
∆P at Bit No restrictions
Tool Face Update Rate 11, 24, or 35 seconds
Full Survey Transmission 55 seconds from pumps-on

User’s Guide 1-21


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Table 1-17 Gamma Ray Sensor Specifications

Sensor Type Scintillation


Measurement API GR
Real-time Yes
Recorded Yes
Range 0 to 250 API
Accuracy ± 3% API of full scale
Statistical Repeatability ± 3 API @ 100 API and
ROP = 60 ft/hr (18.3 m/hr)
Vertical Resolution 6 in. (15.3 cm)
Downhole End to Gamma 2.5 ft (0.8 m)
Sensor 11" from base of Bull Plug

1-22 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Table 1-18 Directional Sensor Measurement


Specifications

Measurement Range Resolution Accuracy*

Inclination 0° - 180.0° 0.1 ± 0.2


Azimuth1,2 0° - 360.0° 0.35 ± 1.0
Toolface:
Magnetic1 0° - 360° 1.4 ± 1.0
Gravity2 0° - 360° 1.4 ± 1.5
Temperature 0° - 150°C 1.1 ± 2.0
Total Magnetic 30,000 - 100 ± 200
Field 66,000
gamma
Dip Angle1 -90° - 90° 0.05 ± 0.3
MTF/GTF Switching, Operator Selectable (default set at 5°)
Downhole End to Directional Sensor: 26.7 ft (8.1 m)

*
All sensor accuracies are 2 Sigma confidence.
1
Assumes typical magnetic field values at 30° latitude.
2
Accuracy applies to inclinations greater than 5.0°.

User’s Guide 1-23


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Resistivity Sensor Specifications

Table 1-19 2 MHz Resistivity

Phase Range 0.1 to 3,000 ohm-m


Difference
(Long Spaced) Accuracy ± 1% (0.1 to 50 ohm-m)
± 0.5 mmho/m
(> 50 ohm-m)
Attenuation Range 0.1 to 500 ohm-m
(Long Spaced)
Accuracy ± 2% (0.1 to 25 ohm-m)
± 1.0 mmho/m
(> 25 ohm-m)
Vertical 8 in. (20 cm) for 90%
Resolution response in conductive beds

Table 1-20 400 kHz Resistivity

Phase Range 0.1 to 1,000 ohm-m


Difference
(Long Spaced) Accuracy ± 1% (0.1 to 25 ohm-m)
± 1.0 mmho/m (> 25 ohm-m)
Attenuation Range 0.1 to 200 ohm-m
(Long Spaced)
Accuracy ± 5% (0.1 to 10 ohm-m)
± 5.0 mmho/m
(> 10 ohm-m)
Vertical 12 in. (30 cm) for 90%
Resolution response in conductive beds

1-24 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Table 1-20 400 kHz Resistivity

Downhole End to MPR Measure Point:


4-3/4" MPR: 10.5 ft (3.2 m)
6-3/4" MPR: 9.3 ft (2.8 m)
8-1/4" MPR: 9.3 ft (2.8 m)

Note: The resistivity measuring point is the


midpoint between the receiver antennas.

Physical Specifications

Table 1-21 MPR Thread/Connection Specifications

Make-up
MPR Sub MPR Upper ID
Torque
Size (inch) Lower Box (inch)
(ft-lb)

3-1/8" Upper Box 2-3/16 2,500 ± 200


3 in. CDP
3-1/8" Lower Pin 2-3/16 2,500 ± 200
3 in. CDP
4-3/4" Upper Box 2-13/16 8,845 ± 400
3-1/2 in. I.F.
4-3/4" Lower Box 2-13/16 8,845 ± 400
3-1/2 in. I.F.
6-3/4" Upper Box 3.5 23,500
NC 46 Mod
6-3/4" Lower Box 3.5 27,500
NC 50
(4-1/2 in. I.F.)
8-1/4" Upper Box 4 38,500
6-5/8 in. Mod

User’s Guide 1-25


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Table 1-21 MPR Thread/Connection Specifications

Make-up
MPR Sub MPR Upper ID
Torque
Size (inch) Lower Box (inch)
(ft-lb)

8-1/4" Lower Box 4 45,000


6-5/8 in. Reg
Note: ft-lb x 1.35582 = Newton Meters (Nm)

Table 1-22 SRIG Pony Sub Thread/Connection


Specifications

Make-up
OD ID
Sub Connection Torque
(inch) (inch)
(ft-lb)

4-3/4" Upper Pin 3-1/2 in. I.F. 2.66 8,845 ±


400
4-3/4" Lower 3-1/2 in. I.F. 2.66 8,845 ±
Box 400
6-3/4" Upper Pin NC 50 3.5 27,500
(4-1/2 in. I.F.)
6-3/4" Lower NC 50 3.5 27,500
Box (4-1/2 in. I.F.)
8-1/4" Upper Pin 6-5/8 Reg 4 45,000
8-1/4" Lower 6-5/8 Reg 4 45,000
Box

1-26 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

Table 1-23 MPR Wear Pads Diameter

Minimum
Size (inch) Maximum Diameter (inch)
Diameter ID

3-1/8" This size has no wear bands.


4-3/4" 5-1/4 5-1/16 OD measured
at wear bands
6-3/4" 7.0 6-13/16 OD measured
at wear bands
8-1/4" 8-1/2 8-5/16 OD measured
at wear bands

User’s Guide 1-27


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Introduction to MPR

•Notes•

1-28 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
Chapter 2
Initial Setup
Probe Based System

Chapter 2 covers the Initial Setup for the


3-1/8 and 4-3/4 in. tools plus other
pertinent details.

Tool Setup

Required Measurements
Note: Always measure the components, DO NOT
assume anything.

• Probe lengths (including pulser length from the


center of the alignment block)
• EEJ length closed (measured to the top of the neck
down)
• EEJ length fully open
• Flow sub, monel, Upper Flex sub
• Depth from top of the flow sub to the center of the
Allen screw bolt hole on the flow sub
• MPR length and distance to the middle of the
receivers from the base of the sub (for offset
calculations)
• Lower flex sub below the MPR

User’s Guide 2-1


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

• Depth from the top of the MPR sub to where the


EEJ sits on the male wet connect pin (known as the
“depth of insertion”)
• From the bottom of the Lower Flex Sub to the
bottom of the Bull Plug on the SRIG

Note: For fishing purposes, measure the MPR


sub’s ODs and their lengths, the lengths and
widths of the wear bands and their locations
referenced from the top of the sub, the SRIG
sub, OD and ID plus any flex subs and
stabilizers (including blade length and OD
and sub wall OD).

2-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System
3-1/8" USMPR Lengths & Spacing
Figure 2-1 USMPR Tool Component Lengths
User’s Guide 2-3
N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

Note: Tool components for the OrientXPress™


(OXP) Ultra Slim Resistivity are different
than the 3-1/8" MPR. You can see these
component differences by referring to the
OrientXPress™ Ultra Slim Resistivity for
OXP Operations Manual, P/N OM35-M41,
Rev. AA.

Approximate Tool Lengths


3-1/8" UP Pulser (Lengths will vary) 2.54 ft. (0.774 m)
3-1/8" NMCSDC (Lengths will vary) 30.00 ft. (9.144 m)
Crush Ring Sub 0.656 ft. (0.200 m)
Wet Stab Sub 2.714 ft. (0.827 m)
Upper Connector Sub 0.750 ft. (0.229 m)
Ultra Slim Resistivity Sub 7.042 ft. (2.146 m)
Lower Connector Sub 0.844 ft. (0.257 m)
SRIG Flex Sub 4.917 ft. (1.499 m)
Total BHA Length 49.46 ft. (15.08 m)
Approximate Probe Lengths
3-1/8" UP Pulser + SDM
(Measured from shoulder of sub) 2.665 ft. (0.812 m)
1-3/4" Modified Tandem Extension 0.500 ft. (0.152 m)
1-3/4" Battery Module Assembly 5.665 ft. (1.727 m)
1-3/4" Battery Module Assembly 5.665 ft. (1.727 m)
1-3/4" Memory Assembly 3.420 ft. (1.042 m)
1-3/4" SWWP-DAS 500 4.990 ft. (1.521 m)
1-3/4" EEJ Assembly fully closed +2" 7.197 ft. (2.143 m)
EEJ Depth of Insertion -1.933 ft. (0.589 m)
Total Probe Length 28.17 ft. (8.586 m)
(without ESBs or EEJ Extension)

2-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

Calculating the ESB Configuration


When arriving on location, strap all of the tools to verify
the lengths quoted in the tables above. (Lengths may vary
from the examples given above). When all of the
individual components are strapped, the ESB
configuration will need to be determined in the following
manner:
a. Add up the lengths for the individual probe
modules and subtract the EEJ’s depth of
insertion.
b. Add the length of the NMCSDC and the Crush
Ring sub.
c. Subtract line a from b to get the value for the
additional spacing.
d. Select ESB configuration and calculate the
resulting EEJ extension.
Example:
NMCSDC + Crush Ring 30.000 + 0.656 30.656 ft.
-28.169 ft.
2.487 ft.
2.487 ft. = 29.844 inches, therefore, a 24" ESB and a 6"
ESB will be required. The resulting EEJ extension will be
0.156 inches. As long as the resulting EEJ extension is not
less than 0" or greater than 6", then the selected ESB
configuration is correct.

User’s Guide 2-5


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

Spacing Calculation Using NaviTrak Pulser


Components:
Pulser (from Alignment Block Center) 3.22
Tandem 0.5
PDM 2.89
Modified Tandem 0.5
Battery 5.94
Modified Tandem 0.5
Battery 5.94
Tandem (ESB #3) 0.5
Battery 5.94
Tandem (ESB #1) 0.5
Flow Switch 2.89
Tandem (ESB #2) 0.5
SDAS 5.24
Tandem 0.5
Memory 3.83
3 Wire EEJ (fully closed EEJ has a built-in tandem connection) 4.71
Probe Total 44.10 ft.

Note: ESBs are numbered in the order of which


they should be used.

Collar:
Flow Sub 9.62
Depth to Allen Screw -0.78
Monel 30.35
Flex Joint 5.75
Depth to Insertion by EEJ 0.80
Adjusted Total Length of Collar 45.74 ft.

Note: The Flow sub is also referred to as the


“Alignment sub” or “Orientation sub”.

Subtract Probe length from Collar length:


45.74 - 44.10 = 1.64 feet (19.68 inches)
Extract a 6 inch tandem and insert an 18 inch ESB between

2-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

the second battery and the flow switch module.

Note: It is a good idea not to use both of the same


size ESBs on the same run.

This will extend the tool length by 12 inches leaving you


7.68 inches short.
The EEJ extends up to 10 inches which will take account
of the 7.68 inches extension required. To have the EEJ
fully extended (or closed) is not desirable as the monel will
stretch (or compress) while in the hole. Calculate the
spacing to allow for a maximum extension of 8 inches
and a minimum extension of 2 inches.

Note: The bottom part of the EEJ module can


rotate freely. However, avoid turning it
more turns than as necessary as the wiring
will be torn.

The total length of the probe tool without the extension on


the EEJ is now 45.10 feet. The total length of the probe tool
with the extension on the EEJ is now 45.74 feet.

Note: The wires used to supply power to


components below the DAS pass in close
proximity to the magnetometer package. The
introduction of any component below the
DAS will have an influence on the accuracy
of the raw magnetometer measurements.
The magnitude of error is dependent on a
variety of factors, including the amount of
current required to operate the module/
sonde, the placement of the memory modem
with respect to the DAS (for components
which communicate and are powered via
M-30), the type of magnetometer in the
DAS, the method used and the placement of
the wires in the channel over the
magnetometer, and the orientation of the

User’s Guide 2-7


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

DAS with respect to the Earth's magnetic


field. The errors in azimuth can be in excess
of 4 degrees. Therefore, ALWAYS place the
memory module on the downhole end of the
DAS. Failure to do so will result in a
substantial error in the azimuth
measurement (see FMM 1185).

Sensor Offset Calculations


DAS:
Bottom of Pressure Barrel -
Dir. Package (Avg.): 8.50"
Mags: 2.00"
Accels: 15.00"
USMPR:
Bottom Shoulder -
Center of Receiver Antennas: 42.25"
SRIG:
Bottom of Bull Plug
Gamma Sensor: 12"
Inclinometer Sensor: 30.6"
The directional package contains a tri-axial magnetometer
spaced 2" from the bottom shoulder and three
accelerometers spaced 15" from the bottom shoulder. The
average distance between the sensors is 8.5" and is taken as
the DAS sensor offset

2-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System
Figure 2-2 USMPR Sensor Offsets
User’s Guide 2-9
N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

DAS
a. Add the probe modules up from the bottom of
the Pulser’s shoulder to the bottom shoulder of
the DAS barrel; i.e., Pulser/SDM + Mod.
Tandem + Battery + Battery + Memory + DAS.
In most cases this should be 22.905 ft.
(6.981 m).
b. Add collar components up from the bottom
shoulder of the SRIG Flex sub to the top
shoulder of the NMCSDC; i.e., SRIG Flex +
Lower Connector + USMPR + Upper
Connector + Wet Stab + Crush Ring +
NMCSDC. In our case with a 30 foot DC, the
length was 46.923 ft. (14.302 m).
c. Subtract line a from b.
46.923 - 22.905 = 24.018 ft. (7.321 m).
d. Subtract the 8.5" from the total of line c to find
the sensor to bit offsett.
24.018 - 0.708 = 23.310 ft
USMPR
Measure from the center of the receiver antennas to the
bottom of the SRIG Flex sub.
10.85 ft (3.31 m)
SRIG
Measure from the bottom of the Bull Plug to the bottom of
the pin of the SRIG Flex sub. Mark the bottom of the Bull
Plug to the outside of the collar. Measure up 12" to locate
the gamma sensor and make a mark. Measure up 30.6" to
locate the inclinometer and make a mark. Measure from the
bottom shoulder of the SRIG Flex sub to the locator mark
of the gamma sensor and inclinometer. The gamma sensor
should be 20.3" and the inclinometer should be 38.8"
assuming there are no cutbacks. Refer back to
Figure 2-2.

2-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

4-3/4" MPR Sensor Calculation


1. Strap the tool components including the required
ESB lengths for the Probe section.
2. Measure the Flow sub, monel, Upper Flex sub, MPR
sub, and Lower Flex sub.
3. There are two ways to get the SDAS offset:
• from the top of the tool (easiest and
recommended way)
• from the bottom of the tool (can be done as a
check procedure).
4. Add the probe lengths together to the base of the
SDAS.
This equals (from the previous example) 36.06 feet
(remember the ESB length).
Subtract 16 inches (1.33 feet) for the SDAS sensor
offset = 34.73 feet.
Add:
Flow Sub 9.62
Depth to Allen Screw -0.78
Monel 30.35
Flex Joint 5.75
MPR Sub 12.00
Lower Flex Sub 5.75
Total = 62.69 ft
5. Subtract 34.73 from 62.69 = 27.96 feet.
Add:
Depth of insertion of EEJ -0.80
MPR Sub 12.00
Lower Flex Sub 5.75
Total = 16.95 ft

User’s Guide 2-11


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

Add:
SDAS offset 1.33 or 16 in.
Tandem 0.50 ft.
Memory Module 3.83 ft.
EEJ 4.71
EEJ extension 0.64 or 7.68 in.
Total = 11.01 ft
Add:
16.95 +11.01 = 27.96 feet (from the base of the SRIG
collar)
The MPR sensor offset can be measured directly from the
base of the Lower Flex sub to the midpoint between the two
receivers. Currently the sensor point is 4.70 feet from the
bottom. In the above example the offset is:
5.75 + 4.7 = 10.45 feet from the base of the Lower Flex sub.
Calculation of Sensor Offsets - 4-3/4" Navi-MPR
Logging Tool
1. If you measured from the bottom of the SRIG sub to
the center of the two receivers in the MPR Logging
sub this will be your resistivity offset and should be
around 10.5 feet.
2. If you have measured from the bottom of the lower
flex sub to the bottom of the SRIG bull plug and
added 0.92 feet (11 inches), then this is your gamma
offset. The near bit inclination will be 2.92 feet
(35 inches).

2-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

Measure to Determine X

SRIG Sub

MPR Sub Probes for SRIG Bull Plug

11"
Gamma

34-1/2"
Near Bit Bottom of
Inclination Bull Plug

Figure 2-3 Calculation of Sensor Offsets

Example: If you measure up into the lower flex sub 2.35


feet to the bottom of the bull plug on the end of the SRIG,
the offset for gamma and the near bit inclination would be
as follows:
Gamma Ray offset from the bottom of the collar
= 2.35 + 0.98 = 3.33 ft.
Near Bit offset from the bottom of the collar
= 2.35 + 2.88 = 5.23 ft.
The Gamma Ray sensor point is 3.60 feet up from the
sealing face of the Lower Flex sub and the SRIG (GZ) near
bit inclination is 5.4 feet from the base of the sub.
Therefore, for the non-I.S. system the nominal offsets from
the base of the lower flex joint are about:
SDAS = 27.90 ft.
MPR = 10.45 ft.
GAMMA = 3.60 ft.
SRIG (GZ) = 5.40 ft.
If the Lower Flex Sub is shorter than 5.80 feet, then

User’s Guide 2-13


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

subtract the difference between it and the actual Lower


Flex Sub measurement from the nominal Gamma Ray and
SRIG GZ offsets.

Minimum Required Lengths


The minimum length for the Probe with no ESB spacing is
44.10 ft. approximately. The minimum length for a collar
is as follows:
The flow sub from the center of
the Allen screw holes = 8.85 ft.
Flex joint = 5.80 ft.
Depth to insertion by EEJ = 0.80 ft.

8.85 ft. + Monel Collar + 5.80 ft. + 0.80 ft.


15.45 ft. + Monel Collar = Total Collar Length
Therefore, the absolute shortest Monel Collar that can be
run is:
44.10 ft. - 15.45 ft. = 28.65 ft. + 0.37 ft.
(Safety Factor) = 29.02 ft.
Example:
Monel = 29.37 ft. with a probe length of 44.13 ft.
Total Monel length = 44.82 - 44.13 = 0.69 feet.
Adding 12 in. ESB = 44.82 - 44.63 = 0.19 ft. or 2.28 in. that
the EEJ is extended.
Monel = 29.87 ft.
Total Monel length = 45.32 - 44.13 = 1.19 ft.
Adding 18 in. ESB = 45.32 - 45.13 = 0.19 ft. or 2.28 in. that
the EEJ is extended.

2-14 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

Spacing Calculations Using the Universal


Pulser

AP Pulser

2.35 ft
2.76 ft

Figure 2-4 Messenger & AP Pulsers - Calculating Probe


Length

The operator must use the 2.35 ft. when calculating the
total length of the tool and the 2.76 ft. to calculate the total
probe length. Notice that the probe includes the threads on
the 4-3/4" pulser sub. Given the following information, the
probe spacing can be determined. The sensor offsets are
calculated using the same bottom up method as follows:
Given:
Monel Pony Collar Length 12.00 ft.
Monel Drill Collar Length 30.44 ft.
Depth of insertion of the EEJ 0.65 ft.
MPR Sub Length 11.90 ft.
Lower Flex Sub Length 5.76 ft.
The Adjusted Collar Length is:
ACL = Monel PC + Monel DC + EEJ insertion =
12.00 + 30.44 + 0.65 = 43.09 ft.
Thus, the sum of the probe section to properly fill this void
will be:
Pulser Probe Section 2.76 ft.
Modified Tandem 0.50 ft.
Battery 5.94 ft.

User’s Guide 2-15


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

Modified Tandem 0.50 ft.


Battery 5.94 ft.
Tandem 0.50 ft.
Battery 5.94 ft.
Spacer Tandem X1 (must be at least 0.50 ft.)
Flow Switch 2.90 ft.
Spacer Tandem X2 (must be at least 0.50 ft.)
DAS 5.25 ft.
Tandem 0.50 ft.
Memory Module 3.84 ft.
EEJ or SJS fully closed 4.71 ft.
Total Probes 39.28 ft.
(This does not include spacers X1 and X2.)
Thus, X1 + X2 + EEJ Expansion = 43.09 - 39.28 = 3.81 ft.
Hence, if X1 = 1.50 and X2 = 2.00, then
EEJ Expansion = 3.81 - 1.50 - 2.00 = 0.31 ft. (3.72 in.).

Note: It is best (due to magnetic interference


problems) to run the Monel Pony Collar on
top of the Monel Drill Collar and screw the
Monel Drill Collar directly into the MPR
Logging sub.

Sensor Offset Calculations


1. Strap the tool components including the required
ESB lengths for the Probe section.
2. Measure the UP collar, Monel, MPR, and Lower
Flex Sub.
3. There are two ways to calculate the SDAS offset.
a. From the top of the tool:
• add the probe lengths together to the base of the
SDAS
• this equals 35.06 ft.
• Subtract 16 in. (1.33 ft.) for the SDAS offset =
33.73 ft.
2-16 Baker Hughes INTEQ
Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

• Add:
UP Collar = 2.35
Monel = 29.44
Pony Monel = 12.00
MPR = 12.00
Lower Flex Sub = 5.75
Total 61.54
Subtract 33.73 from 61.54 = 27.81 ft. from the
base of the Lower Flex Sub (or SRIG Sub).
b. From the bottom of the tool:
• Add:
SDAS offset = 1.33
Tandem = 0.50
Memory = 3.83
EEJ or SJS = 4.72
EEJ Expansion = 0.33
Depth of Insertion
of EEJ = -0.65
MPR Sub = 12.00
Lower Flex Sub = 5.75
Total 27.81
The MPR sensor offset can be measured directly from the
base of the Lower Flex Sub to the midpoint between the
two receivers. Currently, the sensor point is about 4.70 feet
from the bottom. In the above example, the offset is:
5.75 + 4.7 feet from the base of the lower Flex sub.
The SRIG sensor offsets can be measured directly from the
base of the Lower Flex sub by measuring the distance to
the bottom of the SRIG bull plug within the Lower Flex
sub. Then add 11 inches for the Gamma (SrgGA) and 35
inches for the Near Bit Inclination (SrgGZ). Currently, the
Gamma sensor point is about 3.6 feet and the Near Bit
Inclination sensor point is about 5.4 feet. A diagram
showing how to determine the sensor offsets is located
within the previous example.

User’s Guide 2-17


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

Battery Life Calculations


The USMPR battery life calculation was worked out using
BatCalc14. Because the USMPR sub draws less current
then the electronics of MPR subs, the current draw table
was edited for USMPR from 220-180 milliampere. The
tool configuration was set up as a SWWP V5.x DAS, 3X
Splitphase, Universal PDM, Gamma, no flow switch, 1-2
Megabyte memory module, and 2 packs of batteries
hardwired in parallel. Batteries (1-3/4") are predominately
24 ampere-hour BEI batteries. The resulting calculation
showed 120 total operating hours. When run in memory
mode (no pulsing) two batteries should last 150 total
operating hours.
Calculations in the form of Excel spread sheets are
available (see Figure 2-5). With the introduction of new
hardware revisions to the service these calculations will be
updated. Make sure you have current version for the tool
you are running. For assistance with this spreadsheet as
well as determining which revision of PDM that you have,
call your local Technical Support.
In the spreadsheet on the next page, you will see there are
4 cases documented. Two systems include SWWP410 and
SWWP500. With 3 fresh batteries (20 ampere-hour each),
the estimated hours are as follows for 80% circulating,
50% rotating and 3 surveys/hour. These are the estimated
hours:

Table 2-1 Total Operating Hours

SWWP410 SWWP500

2X Splitphase = 131 2X Splitphase = 136


3X Splitphase = 110 3X Splitphase = 124

2-18 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System
Figure 2-5 Probe Battery Life Estimator BatCalc14
Calculations for battery life can be found in the Excel spreadsheet
Battery Life Estimator.
User’s Guide 2-19
N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

Modified Tandem
The Modified Tandem, which replaces the DPDM in the
short term, connects the two batteries initially in series.
The stronger of the two batteries will be drained first until
the battery potentials are the same, effectively producing
one 20 cell battery. Then both batteries are drained
together. This makes tracking power usage difficult and
inefficient. The Modified Tandem will be run until the
DPDM enters the field. It is recognized by having “mod”
stamped on it. When two batteries are run, the Modified
Tandem will be placed between the PDM and battery. If
three batteries are run then the operator is required to run
two modified tandems, one on top of the upper battery, the
other on top of the second battery.

Modified Tandem Versus SDM


A modified tandem may or may not be necessary in the
above string. The following procedure can be used to check
the SDM to see if it performs the modified tandem’s
function (putting the two batteries in parallel instead of
series). If the batteries are run in series the first battery will
deplete and the tool will stop functioning without using any
of the second battery’s power. If they are run in parallel the
batteries are depleted equally at the same time.
Looking at the bottom end of the SDM (side connected to
the DAS not the pulser):

Table 2-2 SDM Pins

Pin 1 Power to downhole tool


Pin 2 Battery #1
Pin 4 Ground
Pin 9 Battery #2

2-20 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

To see if the SDM is wired correctly:


1. Using the DIODE mode on a VOM, measure from
pin #2 (red to Anode) to #1 (black to Cathode). The
VOM should show one diode drop or approximately
0.7 VDC.
2. Reverse the leads, measure from pin #1 to #2. The
VOM should show open.
3. Using the DIODE mode on a VOM, measure from
pin #9 to #1. The VOM should show one diode drop
or approximately 0.7 VDC.
4. Reverse the leads, measure from pin #1 to #9. The
VOM should show open.

Battery Operating Limits


Lay out the batteries if voltages fall below:
• No load = 34
• 100 milliamp = 32
• 400 milliamp = 28
• Pulsing = 24

Note: Batteries may need to be burned-in to


reduce the pacification effects of inactivity.
This can be accomplished by using a Mud
Box or PowerComms.

Salt Saturated Muds


When using any MWD system in salt saturated muds,
corrosion can be a problem and will occur in areas that can
capture or retain drilling fluid. It is recommended that
when running a USMPR tool in a salt saturated fluid that
you flush the tool both internally and externally with fresh
water. If fresh water is not available at the rigsite, then use
a lubricant such as WD-40 or Fluid Film (P/N 67756-002).
This should be available in the rigsite kit. Spray the

User’s Guide 2-21


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

lubricant liberally around the hatch cover and antenna port


hatch covers to remove any drilling fluid.

Hydraulic Calculations
The pressure drop across the entire tool is the summation
of the pressure drop across the probe, the MPR, and the
pulser. The probe and MPR can be easily modeled using
hydraulic theory, however the pulser seems to have a
variable flow area depending on the force from the flow
making it much more difficult to model. Charts have been
compiled from empirical data but a formula cannot be
supplied due to the difficulty in modeling the UP pulser.
See Figure 2-6, Figure 2-7, and Figure 2-8.
The pressure drop across the tool greatly depends on the
pulser. The UP pulser cannot be modeled easily using
hydraulic theory because it appears to have a variable flow
area. Although a formula cannot be supplied for the UP
pulser, pressure drop charts have been compiled from
empirical data for the MPR system using a UP pulser.
NaviTrak pulsers still require a restrictor selection and will
exhibit different system pressure losses.
Do not calculate for annular velocities higher than
50 ft./sec. and pulse height at the tool of more than 700 psi
when selecting restrictors. Using values higher than these
will seriously damage the tool. Note that the recommended
maximum pulse height at the tool is 250 psi.

2-22 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System
Figure 2-6 3-1/8" USMPR Pressure Drop Chart (40 mm)
User’s Guide 2-23
N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System
Figure 2-7 4-3/4" MPR Pressure Drop Chart (47 mm)
2-24 Baker Hughes INTEQ
Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System
Figure 2-8 4-3/4" MPR Pressure Drop Chart (49 mm)
User’s Guide 2-25
N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Initial Setup Probe Based System

•Notes•

2-26 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
Chapter 3
Navi-MPR Communications
& Setup

Chapter 3 covers how to communicate


with and program the SWWP-DAS with
PowerComms. Refer to the SWWP-DAS
User’s Guide P/N 77386UG400, and the
PowerComms System User's Guide
P/N 74151 when reading this section.

Note: Prior to running the tool in the hole, make


up the entire probe and connect it to the
MPR with a crossover cable (Cowbell
cable). Confirm communications, tap test,
monitor the pulsing voltages with the Mud
Box, and confirm pulser actuation. If
possible, use the ROD device to allow the
surface system to decode the data while the
tool is still on deck. Additionally, confirm
that memory files can be opened and that the
on-line surface decoding computer has the
same time as the off-line computer.

Note: It is required that you build and test both


your primary and backup tools as soon as
possible. Do not get into the situation where
you are testing your backup tool for the first
time while tripping out after a failure. Rig

User’s Guide 3-1


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)Navi-MPR Communications & Setup

down time is too costly to suddenly find out


that your backup tool has problems.

There are a number of ways to communicate with the


SWWP-DAS and its associated components. These are
described in the SWWP-DAS and PowerComms User’s
Guides and will not be reviewed here in detail. In some
cases, you may want to check out the SWWP-DAS alone
with PowerComms to confirm inclination, toolface
highside, and toolface rotation, etc.) if space is a limiting
factor on the catwalk or elsewhere. You must be
accustomed to communicating with the tool using all the
methods available.
The required software to communicate and setup the tool is
as follows:
• Poll (Version 77468TE100)
• SUIT 410 (Version 77082R0410) or later
• Test Verification in DSeries (Version 77466TG100
or later)

Note: Make a note of the versions of the software


that you used to program the tool. This will
be needed when discussing tool problems
with the office.

Communication with the modules can be made in various


ways. Which method is selected depends on the space
available on the rig and the experience of the operator. The
methods described below are not all inclusive.
Figure 3-1 shows the PowerComms cable setup used to
communicate directly with the MPR or with the SDAS
module and Memory Module. Note that there are separate
pigtail cables attached to the Pod that allows the field
operator to communicate with the various probe modules,
M-30 bus, etc.

3-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)Navi-MPR Communications & Setup
Figure 3-1 PowerComms Cable Setup
User’s Guide 3-3
N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)Navi-MPR Communications & Setup
J101
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GRA
RED
BLK

11

13
10

12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
P3

4
5
2

A-A
1

7
8
127,00
101,60
A
A
Figure 3-2 Wiring Diagram for Dump Port Cable
3-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ
Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)Navi-MPR Communications & Setup

Dump Port O-ring


Located on the BHI network is Field Maintenance Memo
1339 and a Technical Alert about handling the Memory
Dump port plug. Extreme care should be used on the
installation and removal of this plug. The O-ring on this
plug is susceptible to damage from the snap ring groove.
After installing the dump port plug with care, the snap ring
groove should be inspected for any signs of O-ring
material. It may be necessary to use the brass tools located
in the support kit (P/N 790-000-089) to properly inspect
this groove. If it is suspected any O-ring material may be
in this groove the plug should be removed, the O-ring
should be changed (P/N 728-000-193), and then the plug
should be carefully reinstalled.

Note: This is a list of the current DOS utilities run


from a shell within PowerComms. Those
utilities in brackets will be incorporated into
an NT based application for future tool
communications and diagnostics.

• (Busmon)
• (BM)
• Tooltest
• SUIT
• ToolDump

Note: PowerComms contains the option to


manually select whether battery power or
whether cabin power will be used even
though the tool is assembled with batteries.
If the “Battery Interrupt” option is selected
the operator is requested to input the
desired voltage (30 volts). Upon
application, only those modules below the
batteries are powered up. In other words
there will be no PDM reset pattern initiated

User’s Guide 3-5


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)Navi-MPR Communications & Setup

nor will the PDM/pulser respond to tap


tests. Until an application is launched to
power up the tool, the assembled tool
remains powered down even though the
PDM and the batteries are connected
together via the “Y” cable and the Pod. The
“Battery Interrupt” option gives the
operator the option of controlling when the
tool powers up.

Note: The EEJ and Cowbell cable are not required


for PowerComms communications when
talking to the SDAS and Memory Module
only as there is a catwalk cable available.

1. Connect the Memory, SWWP-DAS, and EEJ


modules together.
2. Run Poll or Tool Verification in DSeries which is
used to communicate with the nodes.
If there is no response, check that the voltage is
approximately 30 volts on the Mud Box or
PowerComms.
Within Poll or Tool Verification note the orientation
of the directional sensor. A roll test can be performed
at this point. Additionally the offset between the

3-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)Navi-MPR Communications & Setup

sensor package highside and an external highside


can be measured as is shown in Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3
Internal Offset
Correction Pulser Highside
Example

SDAS
Orientation

Example: SDAS Highside =128


Universal Pulser Highside =0

The internal offset correction to enter into the on-


line computer system is the complement of the
displayed toolface. For example, Figure 3-3 shows a
toolface of 128, so “-128” (minus 128) would be
entered in to the on-line computer.
The external offset correction will be the orientation
from the pulser sub scribeline to the motor scribe
line.
When the probe based system uses the conventional
NaviGamma style pulser, the highside of the tool is
checked in the same way as conventional
NaviGamma tools where the groove on the large tab
of the SDAS is highside.

User’s Guide 3-7


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)Navi-MPR Communications & Setup

Programming the SDAS


1. After tool communications has been established, run
SUIT.
Refer to the SWWP-DAS User’s Guide
(P/N 77386UG500) when reading this section.
Additionally if you are unfamiliar with SUIT get
advice from the office before continuing any further.

Note: Prior to uploading the configuration from


the tool, load a default configuration (say
suit.cnf) from the disk. View the
configuration then upload from the tool.
View again and note the change in the
configuration file. Save this file before
making any changes. Be aware that high
data rates reduce in-hole pulsing time.

Note: Since this service is being continually


updated the telemetry and/or recorder files
will change. Review the available files with
your supervisor or local Technical Support
to get the most up-to-date versions.

These telemetry formats can be configured for flow on/


flow off surveys. Unless otherwise directed use only
FLOW OFF surveys as surveys of record.

Note: A “Flow On” SWWP-DAS GZ


accelerometer will show 2.8 volts when the
GZ axis is high-sided.

Current “flow-off” SWWP410 based SWWP-DAS


telemetry formats have the ANR surveys set up to acquire
azimuth with 5 second short average survey acquisition
time. As the SDAS has been currently setup to acquire 5
second flow-off surveys no status message will be set with
telemetry words. If anything other than a short average
survey is selected, (i.e., 6 seconds instead of 5 seconds) and

3-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)Navi-MPR Communications & Setup

the tool has been SUITed to record data with flow on


(i.e., “Run when Flow On” not “Run continuously”) then a
status flag will be transmitted with the survey.
Additionally, only the directional sensors will be powered
up during a flow off survey. No additional sensor data will
be acquired during this time. If the telemetry format has
configured the DAS to acquire and transmit Gamma or
MPR in this flow off survey, all zeros will be transmitted.
If the SWWP-DAS is SUITed for a flow on survey (like
the collar tools) then it will respond by sending a flow on
survey and non-zero data. This is not applicable to
SWWP500 based systems but is included here for those
regions who may still be using SWWP410 based software.
2. After loading the appropriate configuration file
select “Mode Switch Telemetry Format” in the
edit menu. See Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4 Mode Switch Telemetry Format Options

This allows you to change the “MPT data rate”, “MPT


modulation type”, and “Telemetry format” if desired.
Currently Splitphase is the recommended modulation

User’s Guide 3-9


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)Navi-MPR Communications & Setup

type. RAW, ANR, BNR, CNR and DNR and ENR can be
selected for “Non Rotating Mode Survey Sequences”.
Selection will depend on the anticipated penetration rate,
toolface update rate desired by the directional driller, data
required by the geologist and if raw or calculated surveys
are to be sent. Remember to type in the number of the line
that the survey is to loop back to in the “Loop Back Entry
#:” field. The program will not allow the operator to leave
either entry in rotating or non-rotating as “0” (as this will
program the tool to stop pulsing at the end of the last survey
sequence until a change of flow or rotation is recognized).
Usually “1” or “2” is entered.

Note: If an approved configuration file is not


available, the following screen examples can
be used. Verify correct operation of the tool
before running it in the hole. Always save a
short report and the configuration used to
program the tool with.

3. In “MPT Format Controls” the setup should be as


shown in Figure 3-5.

Figure 3-5 MPT Format Controls: Telemetry Format

3-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)Navi-MPR Communications & Setup

If any changes are needed, type in the value and then select
“Save”. Changing the value then exiting the screen will not
save the new entry.

Note: Figure 3-6 shows the screen display after


selecting MPT Data Variables. This display
is useful in that the transmitted frequency of
the Phase Difference/Amplitude Ratio can
be verified.

Figure 3-6 MPT Input/Output Variable Display

User’s Guide 3-11


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)Navi-MPR Communications & Setup

4. Enter “Mode Switch Recorder Format” menu.


See Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7 Mode Switch Recorder Format Options

In “Mode Switch Recorder Format” (see Figure 3-7) the


following filenames should be toggled to “F” (open file)
under MEM. Currently no more than 12 files can be
opened (excluding those created by the Master exec):
DirRPM SrgINC
DirFVIB DirSD
DirSU
Mpr24RAW DirTEMP
DirERR SrgGA
GamERR SrgGZ
MprERR
Additional files can be opened according to the operational
situation. It is important to understand that the more files
selected, the faster the memory will fill.
5. Having opened these files select “Edit/Analyze
Recorder Format” and Down Arrow to MEM. The
filenames along with specific information
concerning selected above will appear. The “Initial

3-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)Navi-MPR Communications & Setup

delay” and “Update Rate” can be setup as follows.


See Figure 3-8.

Figure 3-8 Mode Switch Recorder Format Options

While the MPR acquisition rate is 1.25 seconds, the


minimum Update Rate for MPR is 10 seconds (i.e., 4
transmitters x 2 frequencies x 1.25 = 10 seconds). The
MPR sensor therefore remains powered up for the entire 10
seconds. The acquisition rate for each bucket of Gamma
Ray is 2.5 seconds. If 4 buckets are selected, the sensor
will be powered up all the time with a 10 second
acquisition time. The Gamma could also be set up for 12.5
second update rate with a command extension of 5 and a
30 second initial delay. Pay attention to the Fill/Wrap
times. Data storage works on a “Last in, First out” basis.
With one memory you should ensure that your memory fill
times are slightly larger than your battery life. This will
ensure that you will not drill ahead with a full memory or
a memory that is wrapping over good data. Remember,
data storage works on a “Last in, First out” basis.
The Initial Delays have been staggered by one second for
each file. This has been set up to avoid possible Bus
contention.

User’s Guide 3-13


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)Navi-MPR Communications & Setup

The sequence shown in Table 3-1 should be set up as


follows:

Table 3-1 Recorder

Recorder MEM Node INIT Update Max CMD Log


File Size
Filename 01234567 Delay Rate Rec Ext Mode

DirFVIB Fccccccc 10 30 0 0 0 B

DirRPM Fccccccc 34.0 60.0 0 0 2 B

DirSD cccccccc 35.0 60 0 0 1 N

DirTEMP Fccccccc 36.0 60 0 0 2 B

Mpr24R Fccccccc 30.0 10 0 0 1 B


AW

SrgGA Fccccccc 31 12.5 0 0 5 B

SrgGZ Fccccccc 32 180 0 0 1 B

SrgINC Fccccccc 33 180 0 0 1 B

DrERR Fccccccc 0.0 0.0 0 2048 N/A B

GamERR Fccccccc 0.0 0.0 0 2048 N/A B

MprERR Fccccccc 0.0 0.0 0 2048 N/A B

In this case the Gamma acquisition time is 12.5 seconds


with 5 buckets of data being acquired in this interval.

Note: The memory size is 2 MB so set the memory


kB to 2,048 in the Recorder Format Menu
instead of 512. When running batteries
check the fill/wrap hours to make sure that
you do not run out of memory before your
batteries die. Ensure that DirERR,
GamERR and MprErr files have been
selected to be opened.

3-14 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)Navi-MPR Communications & Setup

6. In “SWWP Internal Parameters” select “SWWP


Dir node Parameters” and ensure the screen setup
as follows. See Figure 3-9.

Figure 3-9 Directional Mode Editing

For SWWP410 based systems, Flow off survey


control = “1” unless a flow-on SWWP-DAS is
available in which case either option can be selected.
(“1” is for flow off or “0” is for flow on).
As is shown above, for SWWP500 based systems
flow off surveys are selected by toggling to
“Enabled”. Flow detection can be toggled to
“Vibration” when using the “FlowDas” to sense
flow or to “Flow Switch” otherwise.
7. Select SAVE Configuration in the main menu.
Name the configuration file with “.cnf” as the
extension prior to programming the tool.
8. Select Program SWWP which allows you to load
this new configuration to the tool.

User’s Guide 3-15


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)Navi-MPR Communications & Setup

9. To confirm correct programming, select “Load


Configuration From Disk” using “suit.cnf” (i.e., a
default configuration).
10. Select “Edit Configuration” to verify “suit.cnf” was
loaded properly.
11. Select “Load Configuration From SWWP” to upload
the configuration (*.cnf) from the SWWP.
12. Select “Edit Configuration” to verify the information
from the SWWP is correct.
13. Select “Short Form Request”, create and save a
report (*.srp) to double-check the SWWP and have a
hard copy of the configuration.
14. Print and fax a copy of the report to the office.

3-16 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)Navi-MPR Communications & Setup

•Notes•

User’s Guide 3-17


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)Navi-MPR Communications & Setup

•Notes•

3-18 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
Chapter 4
Navi-MPR Catwalk Test

Chapter 4 covers testing the MPR tool on


the Catwalk/Pipe Deck area.

Communicating with SDAS, SGAM, & Navi-


MPR

Overview
“Tool Verification” in the DSeries offline utilities can be
used to communicate with the sub and run the required
verifications. Refer to the DSeries User’s Guide,
Version 1 (P/N 77466UG100) for further details.

Note: Prior to running the tool in the hole, make-


up the entire probe and connect it via the
EEJ to the top of the MPR sub with the
“Cowbell Cable”. If you are not using the
phono (M30) plug, then tape the connection
to prevent water from intruding and shorting
out the tool. Confirm communication, tap
test, monitor the pulsing voltages with the
Mud Box/PowerComms, and confirm pulser
actuation. Additionally, confirm that
memory files are opened and that the online
computer has the same time as the offline
computer before initializing the memory. In
the interests of safety and to prevent
accidental shorting of the tool, DO NOT
make up the connections while power

User’s Guide 4-1


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Catwalk Test

(battery or rig) is supplied to the tool. Rig-


up the tool, connect the cables and control
the application of power either via the Mud
Box, cabin box or PowerComms. When
troubleshooting components or the entire
system apply the same practices. Call your
local Technical Support for help if
necessary.

Note: PowerComms contains the option to


manually select whether battery power or
whether cabin power will be used even
though the tool is assembled with batteries.
If the “Battery Interrupt” option is selected
the operator is requested to input the desired
voltage (30 volts). Upon application, the
only components that are powered up are
those below the batteries. In other words
there will be no PDM reset pattern initiated
nor will the PDM/pulser respond to tap
tests. Until an application is launched to
power up the tool, the assembled tool
remains powered down even though the
PDM and the batteries are connected
together via the “Y” cable and the Pod. The
“Battery Interrupt” option gives the
operator the option of controlling when the
tool powers up.

The required software to communicate with the tool is as


follows:
• Poll (Version 77468TE100)
• DSeries (Version 77466TG100 or later)
• (MPRTEST Version 77384TD110)

Note: Make a note of the versions of the software


that you have SUITed the tool with. This will

4-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Catwalk Test

be needed when discussing tool problems


with the office.

Communication with the modules can be made in various


ways. Which method is selected depends on the space
available on the rig and the experience of the operator. The
methods described below are not all inclusive. Remember,
communication with the 3-1/8" USMPR must be made by
SWWP-DAS mode since the entire tool communicates by
DV485.
1. If this method is selected to check the tool before the
Air Hang, synchronize the offline and online
computer clocks together before initializing the
memories of the tool in DSeries (which sets the tools
clock to the offline computers clock).
For non-I.S. PowerComms cable setups, refer to
Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 PowerComms Full Tool Communications

2. If using the PowerComms system remember to


“Call” the Pod before inserting the dump cable
into the dump port on the MPR sub. Once this has
been done successfully, DSeries and other
communications utilities can then be run.

User’s Guide 4-3


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Catwalk Test

3. Run “Test Verification” in DSeries to check the


operation of the individual components if necessary.
Highside values for the DAS and the Universal
Pulser can be checked while running “Test
Verification” in DSeries. Use the gamma ray
calibration blanket, if there is one available, to check
for a change in gamma ray values.
4. When using SWWP based systems and the system
has been SUITed to “Run with flow on”, simulate
flow via the Mud Box or PowerComms to ensure that
data is being written to memory. If the SWWP-DAS
has been configured as a “FlowDAS” then the tool
will have to be tap tested as the flow line is no longer
being monitored.
5. Exit from Tool Verification and select the “Dump
Memories” option in DSeries.
6. Select Utilities Menu, then “MEMVIEW” and
check the data in the files. In particular, view the
error files (those indicated by an FB in the file name).
7. If the data is good, select “Initialize Memories” to
clear the memory of data and to synchronize the
tool’s clock with the offline computers before the Air
Hang. Additionally, have an operator’s watch set to
the tool time. This will help avoid confusion if power
is lost to the surface system.
At some stage during the catwalk tests, it is strongly
recommended that you test the tool in conjunction
with the surface decoding system. This will confirm
that the surface computer is correctly decoding what
is being transmitted. This will prevent incidences of
mis-SUITing and other potential operator errors
from being detected until the tool is on bottom.
This configuration can be emulated with the
introduction of ROD (Rigsite Optical Device).

4-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Catwalk Test

Probe Tool Communications with


PowerComms
The entire probe can be setup and checked out through
PowerComms. Reference should be made to the
PowerComms System User’s Guide (P/N 74151) for
details. Once communications have been established then
the current DOS utilities like DSeries and SUIT can be run.

Note: PowerComms contains the option to


manually select whether battery power or
whether cabin power will be used even
though the tool is assembled with batteries.
If the “Battery Interrupt” option is selected,
the operator is requested to input the
desired voltage (30 volts). Upon application
the only components that are powered up
are those below the batteries. In other words
there will be no PDM reset pattern initiated
nor will the PDM/pulser respond to tap
tests. Until an application is launched to
power up the tool, the assembled tool
remains powered down even though the
PDM and the batteries are connected
together via the “Y” cable and the Pod. The
“Battery Interrupt” option gives you the
option of controlling when the tool powers
up.

Revised Operational Procedures


The following is a guide for the make-up of the 4-3/4 inch
Navi-MPR with the 3 conductor stab.

User’s Guide 4-5


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Catwalk Test

Catwalk
Clean out the female end of the EEJ before use. Use
excessive amounts of Freon TF (or another cleaning
product).
1. Apply a light coat of DC-4 to the male end of the
EEJ.
2. When using the Cowbell cable for the 3 conductor
stab, it is important to use the split ring centralizer on
the female end of the Cowbell to help prevent side
loading of the male pin when the MPR sub is
horizontal. Insert the male Cowbell into the EEJ
(female) and ensure that it will slide in and out and
rotate without binding.

CAUTION:
Do not run the EEJ if any binding occurs between
the male pin on the Cowbell and the female stab on
the EEJ.

3. With the Cowbell cable connected, perform the


normal software checks to ensure that the Navi-MPR
performs as a complete system. Confirm that the
highside orientation corresponds to the big tab on the
barrel of the DAS (on the 2" system). Ensure that a
tap test is performed.
4. After successfully completing these tests, disconnect
the Cowbell cable. Apply a light coat of DC-4 to the
male end of the EEJ, then install the protective plug.
Compress the EEJ expansion joint and tape it closed
to prevent it from opening up when picking the probe
up to the rig floor.
5. Mark the “Highside of the Probe” on top of the
Alignment Block or on the side of the Universal
Pulser, while the probe is still on the catwalk.
Remember that once the probe is lowered into the
4-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ
Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Catwalk Test

collar, you will no longer be able to locate highside


of the probe other than by this mark.
6. Check that all the anchor bolts are in place before the
probe is picked up.

User’s Guide 4-7


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Catwalk Test

•Notes•

4-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
Chapter 5
Navi-MPR Verification Procedures

Chapter 5 covers the procedures for Air


Hanging and Rig Floor Verification for
the Navi-MPR tools.

Overview
A utility called Tooltest in the DSeries offline utilities has
been written to perform the verifications. If using this
utility for the verification, enter all the shop base air offsets
prior to picking up the sub. Refer to the DSeries User’s
Guide, Version 1 (P/N 77466UG100) for further details.
It is a requirement that the MPR sub be checked out as soon
as is feasibly possible. The Catwalk test is no substitute for
a Crane Hang.

Note: It is required that you build and test both


your primary and backup tools as soon as
possible. Do not get into the situation where
you are testing your backup tool for the first
time while tripping out after a failure. Rig
down time is too costly to suddenly find out
that your backup has problems.

Note: To ensure that the correct Gamma Ray


calibration factor is entered with the 4-3/4
inch system, remember that the sensor is
housed in a flex sub that has 2 OD’s. DO
NOT assume that just because the Flex sub

User’s Guide 5-1


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Verification Procedures

has a nominal OD of 4-3/4 inch that this is


the OD of the sub around the sensor.

Crane Hang Procedures


1. Rig-up the PowerComms cables to the MPR sub.
2. Establish communications using Poll.
3. Secure the crossover cable and the switch block
(by using tie-wraps or tape) or Pod to the MPR sub.
Keep the cable away from the transmitters.

Note: At this point you may wish to pull out the


memory dump crossover cable from the
dump port. This will prevent accidental
breakage when the crane picks up the tool
out of the cradle. Ensure that you have
control of the Navi-MPR sub when you
reinsert the crossover cable. Run Poll again
to confirm communications if necessary.

4. Coordinate with the crane operator in regards to


picking up the tool.

Note: Have either end roped off with a securing


line so that the tool can be controlled when
it is picked up. Pick-up the tool about 15 feet
off the deck. Be careful that, as the tool is
picked up, the 4-pin cable crossover insert is
not broken off at the dump port.

5. Enter DSeries and run the verification. Remember to


have the shop Base Air offsets entered already.

Note: Check the differences between the two Air


Hangs. Apply the comparison limitations to
determine whether the tool is operating
within operational standards.

5-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Verification Procedures

6. The verification routine shows the shop base air


values, the verification’s air values and the
difference between the two. The raw data screen
from a test verification is shown in Figure 5-1.

Figure 5-1 Raw Data Screen

The raw data screen is explained as follows: (from 2 MHz


data, Transmitter 1 (T1).
All four are raw values.
Phase R1 = Phase Receiver1 90.1648
Phase R2 = Phase Receiver 2 84.8199
Attn. R1 = Attenuation Receiver 1 5.0742
Attn. R2 = Attenuation Receiver 2 10.7792

Pdiff T1 = Phase Difference for T1


(R1 - R2) = 5.3448
Attn T1 = Attenuation for T1
(R2 - R1) = 5.7050
Phase T1T2 = (diff T1 + diff T2)/2 = 0.4614
PDRes T1T2 = Bogus resistivity values
Phase Difference T1T2 is the compensated value from the
two transmitters. The compensated T1T2 Attenuation or
Phase Difference are the long spaced Base Air Offset

User’s Guide 5-3


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Verification Procedures

values entered into the surface system computer. The rule


of thumb in accessing the quality of data during an Air
Hang is as follows:
• 4 compensated phases within 0.1 deg of the Air
Hang
• 4 compensated attenuations within 0.1 dB of the Air
Hang
• All RAW data is consistent.
Additionally apply the following constraints:
For 2 MHz, between transmitter 1 and 2, note that Attn
T1R2 (10.7792) is close to Attn T2R1 (11.5866). The
values for Attn T1R1 and Attn T2R2 are equally close. If
they are significantly different; i.e., more than ± 3 dB apart
there may be problems with one of the transmitters even if
the compensated data looks good. Check with the office
before running. Check additionally that the compensated
phase difference and attenuation values fall within the
ranges below. These apply to the 4-3/4 inch MPR tool.
T1, T2 2 MHz = PHASE LONG -1.0 to 0.5 deg.
ATTN LONG 5.4 to 6.1 dB.
T3, T4 2 MHz = PHASE SHORT -1.5 to 0.5 deg.
ATTN SHORT 8.3 to 8.9 dB.

T1, T2 400 kHz = PHASE LONG -0.5 to 1.0 deg.


ATTN LONG 6.4 to 7.1 dB.
T3, T4 400 kHz = PHASE SHORT -0.5 to 1.0 deg.
ATTN SHORT 10.4 to 11.1 dB.
This is displayed on the example 4-3/4 inch MPR Pre/Post
Comparison Sheet on the next page.

5-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Verification Procedures

User’s Guide 5-5


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Verification Procedures

7. Coordinate with the crane operator when lowering


the sub back into the cradle. Ensure that a BHI
operator is present to monitor the crane operator
actions. Remove the dump cable from the dump port
before replacing the tool in its cradle.

Rig Floor Verification Procedures


Ensure that prior to the MPR tool being picked-up,
communication to the tool has been established, that the
SDAS has been SUITed, that memory files have been
opened and that surface system has been setup with the
correct telemetry format. Additionally, ensure that you
have done a full Catwalk test of the tool (ideally being
connected via the MSS porting cable to the surface
system if available).

Summary of Events

Overview
This short section details the sequence of events the
operator will go through when communicating with the
4-3/4 inch MPR sub during a rig floor verification.
• Poll to confirm communications
• DSeries to initialize memories
• Busmon
(Hexidecimal) to view node activity (activity is
displayed when flow is
simulated or the tool has been
SUITed to store data to memory
irrespective of flow state)
• DSeries to run the verification and to
view the correct files have been
opened in the memory
• DSeries dump and view the data

5-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Verification Procedures

• BM
(graphical) view node activity prior to
disconnecting from the tool

Prior to Air Hang


1. Run the tool communication cables to the rig floor,
ensuring that you have enough to be able to pick-up
the tool 10 to 15 feet off the rotary table.
2. After picking-up the tool, remove the MPR subs
communication plug. With the correct pigtail cable,
plug the other end into the tool. See Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2
Establishing Tool
Communications
The MPR Sub is
in the slips and
the operators are
about to establish
communications.
Note that the 4-
pin IO 1039
crossover cable is
held in the hands
of the operator on
the right.

Secure the cable, so that the plug will not disconnect


while the tool is being picked-up. If the
PowerComms system is being used, ensure that you
call the Pod before inserting the MPR cable
(P/N 74105-01) into the dump port. Once an
application is initiated, PowerComms will detect the
presence of battery power and prompt the operator
as to whether he wishes to continue with external or
dual power or to abort the process.

User’s Guide 5-7


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Verification Procedures

3. Confirm communications with the entire tool before


picking it up to do the verification. Remember that
the PowerComms must be set to SWWP-DAS to
communicate with a 3-1/8" USMPR because the
entire tool communicates on DV485. Run Poll for
confirmation.
Check for part numbers and good status values.

Note: If “8001” is seen for the “dir” status this


either indicates that a flow on survey has
been selected or, if it stays only
momentarily, that a flow off survey has been
selected.

4. Enter DSeries and select “Initialize Memories”.


Delete what is in the memory if this has not been
done already. The clocks will be set at this time.
Ensure the surface decoding gear has the same time
and date as the offline computer.
5. Run Hexidecimal Busmon. This selection will
display the node activity if the tool has been SUITed
to acquire data irrespective of the flow state or if
flow is simulated. The PowerComms software will
allow you to simulate flow. Remain in this utility for
3 minutes to allow for data to be stored to memory.
For SWWP based tools, simulate flow by tap testing
the tool.
6. In DSeries run the verification software
(i.e., Tooltest).

Note: Ensure that a BHA has been correctly setup


prior to running the verification with the
Base Air offsets correctly entered for the
MPR tool being run in the hole.
Additionally, ensure the correct GRAPI
correction factor has been entered for
Gamma Ray.

5-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Verification Procedures

SRIG Correction Factor (GRAPICF)


All SRIGs need to be properly calibrated before they
are shipped to the field. The tools will be shipped
with the normal “API Calibration Sheet” taped to the
tool. To get the Gamma Ray API correction factor
for this BHA, you must know the OD and ID of the
SRIG Flex sub. The OD is 2.875" and the ID is
2.197". Subtract the OD from the ID and you will
get 0.678". Go to the “API Calibration Report” table
and look for the line with 0.678" as the wall
thickness. You will notice that the two closest wall
thicknesses are 0.6250 and 0.6875, so you will have
to do some linear interpolation for the value. Below
is an example:

Table 5-1

No. OD-ID Factor

5 0.6250 1.681
0.6780 ?.???
6 0.6875 1.718

( 0.6875 – 0.6780 )
?.??? = ------------------------------------------- × ( 1.718 – 1.681 ) – 1.718 = 1.712
( 0.6875 – 0.6250 )

For this example, you would use the GRAPICF in


DSeries as 1.712.
7. Apply the usual quality constraints (See the previous
section) you would use on the data from the Air
Hang. Remember that the amount of pipe in the
derrick will have an effect on the data. Check that the
files you have SUITed the tool to record have been

User’s Guide 5-9


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Verification Procedures

opened in the memory. Their size will indicate if data


has been written to them. Remember that while in
this screen and during the verification process that
data will not be written to memory. You will not see
the file size increase.
8. Allow the tool to run for 3 minutes so to allow the
memory to begin storing again.
9. Once the verification process has finished, select the
option to “Dump Memories” to Run #99.
10. Select Utilities Menu, then MEMVIEW and check
that the files have been created. In particular, the
error files (those indicated by an FB in the file name).
Additionally, view the Gamma Ray files and note the
data. The directional survey data and MPR data can
be checked likewise. The data should be consistent.
11. Enter “Graphical BM” to monitor node activity as a
final check before disconnecting from the tool. If
necessary, simulate flow with PowerComms if the
tool has been SUITed to store data while flow is on
only.
12. If the Air Hang is good with all the status values
being “0000”, run the tool back in the hole to the
MPR sub. Remove the dump cable and insert the
dump plug.
13. At this point, the BHA can be picked up and oriented
to the motor if this has not been done already.
14. Run in the hole to perform the surface test. If it is
possible, pump on the tool until Gamma Ray and
Resistivity data is transmitted to confirm that null
data is not being acquired. At times, Resistivity data
may be all zeros due to the casing.

5-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Verification Procedures

•Notes•

User’s Guide 5-11


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Verification Procedures

•Notes•

5-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
Chapter 6
Navi-MPR Tool Installation

Chapter 6 covers the procedures for


picking up and running the Navi-MPR
tool in the hole.

Picking-up the 4-3/4" Tool


Note: As the probe length can be up to 47 feet
long, picking-up the entire probe in one
piece can be awkward for you and may put
undue strain on the tandem and module
connections. Pick up the probe in two pieces
if this is the case. Placing an ESB at the
battery/flow switch connection will aid in
picking-up and laying out the tool.

The collar sections will arrive in the crate in the following


manner:
• Blank/MPR/flex sub (containing the SRIG
module)
(The blank sub may or may not be attached to
the MPR sub.)

Note: Make up the “wet connect” lubricated at all


times. Place the Blank sub above the MPR
sub to keep fluids and debris from getting to
the electrical connections. Dope the
connections between the Blank sub and the
MPR with Alco grease or Lubriplate. The

User’s Guide 6-1


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

MPR sub can be picked up with or without


the blank sub on top. Before the “blank” sub
is put on the top of the MPR sub, clean and
lubricate the male stab with DC-4. Ideally
the MPR sub should arrive at the rig with
the Blank sub already made up to it. If the
blank sub is not attached to the MPR sub use
chain tongs to make up the sub. The SRIG
module is housed in the lower flex joint
already made-up to the MPR sub and these
two should be shipped together.

1. Pick-up the MPR section using a normal lift sub and


make it up to the BHA by using the appropriate
torque (8,845 ± 400 ft-lb for 3-1/2 inch I.F.
connections with an ID of 2-13/16 inch).
2. After the MPR sub is in the rotary table, make up the
“blank” sub with chain tongs (if this has not been
done). Avoid setting the slips on the antenna or the
dump ports. Do not forget to put a collar clamp (dog
collar) around the MPR sub before backing off the
Lift sub.
3. Avoid excessive amounts of pipe dope. Only dope
the “Pins” and sealing face of each connection. It is
recommended to use Lubriplate on the pins of Blank
sub and upper flex sub because it is non-conductive.
Remember that the probe is “hot” once the batteries
are connected; therefore, using Lubriplate reduces
the chance of shorting out the wet stab during probe
installation. Using pipe dope only on the “pins”
reduces the amount of pipe dope that will fall into the
collar, thereby reducing the chance of a dead short.
4. Pick and make up the remaining collar sections (the
flex sub, collar and flow sub). Remember to torque
all the components before they go below the rotary
table.

6-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

5. Whenever possible, pick the probe up in one piece.


Prior to picking up the probe, ensure that the
expansion joint has been taped closed, that the wet
connect has been thoroughly cleaned, and the
protective insert placed in the wet connect. Secure
the insert with tape if necessary. Check the position
of the highside mark on the Pulser. If required to
pick up the probe in two pieces use the following
procedures.
6. Place the dummy Apollo head at the top of the ESB
(which should be positioned approximately in the
middle of the probe (ideally below the batteries).
Pick-up the lower half of the probe with the Slip-a-
Vator. Make sure the plug is inserted inside the
female end of the EEJ and that the expansion joint
has been closed and taped up. Without a plug, a
rubber cover or tape should be placed over the end of
the EEJ to protect it.
7. Once the probe is hanging vertically on the rig floor,
remove the rubber cover from the end of the EEJ.
The protective plug can stay. Remove the tape from
the expansion joint and extend the expansion joint.
This will make access to it easier.

Note: If the protective cover is left on the end of


the EEJ or the tape is left on the expansion
joint, it may not be possible to use the EEJ
extractor tool to pull the bottom of the EEJ
out of the flex sub. If no plug is available,
then use several strips of electrical tape to
prevent any contaminants from entering
the female wet stab while it is being
lowered into the collar. Make sure that the
EEJ expansion joint is free to both extend
and retract and that it will rotate freely.
Resist turning it excessively as too many
turns will strip some internal wiring from
inside the EEJ. Ensure that it will rotate, but

User’s Guide 6-3


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

bring the wet connect back to its original


position when finished. Lubricate this
expansion joint with non-conductive grease.
DO NOT USE THE EEJ if it will not rotate
freely, as this may damage the male stab
during make up.

8. Lower the probe into the collar, engage the Base


Plate and remove the Slip-a-Vator.
9. Install the Finger Protector. See Figure 6-1.

Finger Protector

Base Plate
Figure 6-1 Finger Protector

10. Pick-up the top half of the probe. Remember to have


the restrictor in place and the restrictor carrier seated
into the Alignment sub if using a Block Pulser.
Carefully, lower the top section of the probe into the
Finger Protector. Adjust the set screws to allow
enough space to connect the Bendix connection to
the ESB. At this point you should align the big tab
and slots of the Finger Protector together, then lower
the top section on to the ESB. Keep the Finger
Protector on at this stage as it will help keep the top

6-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

section vertical. Once the two sections have been


made-up, remove the Finger Protector and secure the
two sections together with bolts.
11. Prior to running the tool into the Monel, listen/
observe the tool go through its power-up/reset
pattern if using a PDM. Once this is completed, tap
test the tool to ensure that it will respond to
simulated flow. If you are using a SDM, then you
may not hear the power-up/reset pattern.
12. Pick up the full probe; remove the Base Plate and
lower the tool into the Flow Sub and Monel.
13. After lowering the pulser into the collar (the
Alignment Block should be seated and the painted
line around the Alignment Block clearly visible if
using a Block Pulser). If using an UP, then make the
connection to the Monel.
14. Lift the collars up to the Blank sub and remove. Be
careful not to damage the EEJ or the “Wet Connect”.
15. Pull the bottom of the EEJ out far enough with the
extraction tool, so that the Spacer/Crush Ring and
Split Ring Centralizer can be assembled on the EEJ.
Remove the inserted plug from the wet connect then
inspect, clean, and lightly lubricate the male wet
connection with DC-4. See Figure 6-2.

User’s Guide 6-5


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

Figure 6-2 Female Extractor Tool

Note: If contamination of the female wet stab is


suspected, flush out the EEJ using Contact
Cleaner. Continue this cleaning until you
are satisfied that the female wet stab is free
of contamination.

16. Once the stabs have been cleaned and lubricated,


attach the Crush Ring assembly. Lubricate the
internal diameter of the Split rings as well as the
outside diameter. This will reduce or prevent the wet
connect from rotating while the flex sub and the
MPR is being made up. Remember there is only a
finite number of turns the wet connect can be rotated
before internal wires are torn from their mounting. If
you cannot attach the crush ring assembly you have
miscalculated the spacing. Remember that you
should not have the EEJ extended more than 8 inches
or less than 2 inches when the Crush Ring butts up to
the flex sub tool joint. See Figure 6-3 and Figure 6-4.

6-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

Figure 6-3 Crush Ring Assembly

Bottom of Pin
(Upper Flex Sub)

Exposed Section of EEJ


New Crush Ring
Must be 2-8 inches All rings have the
with the EEJ fully same OD, Rev.D
extended
Spacer Cross Section

Centralizer (2 piece),
with O-rings
Bottom of EEJ
Figure 6-4 Crush Ring Assembly Diagram

User’s Guide 6-7


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

Note: The Crush Ring itself has a circular upset


running around the top of the ring. This
upset has been designed to be inserted into
the inside diameter of the upper flex sub,
helping to centralize the crush ring.

This picture shows the individual components of the


assembly and their correct positioning relative to
each other. O-rings (P/N 728-500-125) are used to
secure the Split Rings around the EEJ.
17. After assembly, push the EEJ up until the assembly is
in contact with the pin of the upper flex sub.

Note: If the top of the Crush Ring will not connect


with the pin, then something is seriously
wrong and no attempt should be made to
stab into the MPR sub. In this instance,
check your spacing calculations or the
extension on the EEJ.

18. Take one last look at the male and female wet stab
and ensure that nothing has contaminated them.

CAUTION:
Contamination could result in a tool failure.

Apply a small quantity of DC-4 to the top of the male


wet stab, and the outer sides of the Crush Ring
assembly. See Figure 6-5.

6-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

Apply lubricant
to entire surface
and inside the
Wet Connect

Figure 6-5 Stacking Preparation

19. Gently lower the female end of the EEJ over the
male pin of the MPR sub and start the collar
connection threads. Hand tighten to about a 0.15
inch gap between the upper Flex sub and the MPR
sub connection faces. The end of the Flex Sub pin
should be shouldered up to the Crush Ring at this
point. If the gap between the connection faces is
outside of the range of 0.070 - 0.200 inch, then
something is wrong. Back out the connection and
inspect the Crush Ring assembly. Once the gap is
correct, torque the connection to 8,845 ± 400 ft-lb.
See Figure 6-6.

User’s Guide 6-9


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

Gap Equals: 0.070-0.200 inch


Figure 6-6 Measuring the Gap (Vernier Caliper)

6-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

Picking-up the 3-1/8" Tool


1. Make the Lift Sub (3" CDP Pin Down) up to the top
of the USMPR Suite (Wet Stab Sub, Upper
Connector Sub, USMPR Sub, Lower Connector Sub,
and SRIG Flex Sub). Tighten the connection with
chain tongs. Pick the suite up and make it up to the
BHA using the appropriate torque of 2,500 ft-lb for
3" CDP connections.
2. Remove the Lift sub and make the Blank sub up to
the top of the Wet Stab Sub. Do not forget to put a
collar clamp (dog collar) around the USMPR sub
before backing off the lift sub.
3. Make up the Crush Ring sub with the Blank Sub.
The Crush Ring Sub is a 3" CDP Pin X Pin sub. The
groove in this sub is for the crush ring and should be
facing downhole.
4. Pick up the Drill Collar (NMCSDC) and make up to
the Crush Ring Sub. Torque for 3" CDP is
2,500 ft-lb.
5. Lower the BHA into the rotary table.
6. Carefully pick up the probe suite (3-1/8" Universal
Pulser, SDM, MOD Tandem, 2 Batteries, ESBs,
Memory Module, FlowDAS, and EEJ). Lift and
support the probe at the base of the pulser as it is
being lifted from horizontal off the catwalk.
7. Lower the probe suite into the NMCSDC and make
up the pulser. 3" CDP connections require 2,500 ft-lb
of torque.
8. The lift sub is then made up to the top of the pulser.
Be careful with the lift sub. It should be straight
when it is lowered onto the probe. Lowering the lift
sub into the pulser crooked can and has broken the
inlet screen off of the pulser.
9. Pick the BHA up to the Wet Stab/Blank Sub
connection and remove the Blank Sub. The bottom

User’s Guide 6-11


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

portion of the EEJ will be exposed. Spray a sparse


amount of non-conductive lubricant into the bottom
of the EEJ and top of the Wet Stab sub to provide just
enough lubrication to aid in assembly and
disassembly. See Figure 6-7.

Figure 6-7 BHA/Wet Stab Sub

10. Assemble the Crush Ring and Split Ring Centralizer


as shown in Figure 6-8. The groove on the Crush
Ring is the uphole end. This groove should fit into
the groove on the crush ring sub. Apply grease to the
inner and outer surfaces of both the Crush Ring and
Split Ring Centralizer. The grease helps keep the

6-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

Crush Ring from crushing unsymmetrically when


the connection is torqued up.

Figure 6-8 Crush Ring & Split Ring Centralizer

11. Collapse the EEJ so the top of the Crush groove fits
into the Crush Ring Sub.
12. Make up the upper BHA with the lower BHA with
chain tongs before applying torque. A gap may not
necessarily be seen in this connection before
applying torque. The required torque for 3" CDP
thread is 2,500 ft-lb.

Note: Rig floor make-up for the OrientXPress™


(OXP) Ultra Slim Resistivity is different
than the 3-1/8" MPR. Refer to the

User’s Guide 6-13


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

OrientXPress™ Ultra Slim Resistivity for


OXP Operations Manual, P/N OM35-M41,
Rev. AA.

Rig Floor Makeup for Memory-only Tool


The memory only tool was designed to avoid the EEJ wet
stab connection. It is commonly called the MAD Pass tool.
This tool avoids the wet stab connection by having all the
probe components hanging off the bottom of the MPR sub,
below the gamma ray module. Because this tool does not
have a pulser, a battery tandem (P/N 703-501-145) was
created to close the circuit. The battery tandem acts as a
modified tandem with the addition of a jumper between
pins one and two. These pins close the circuit. Since the
tool does not use the EEJ/wet stab connection, the male wet
stab has been replaced by a nose cone. The order of
components from top to bottom consist of the MPR with
upper adapter sub utilizing nose cone, SRIG, battery
tandem, battery, 2nd battery, DAS, MEM, and a bull plug.
See Figure 6-9.

6-14 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

Figure 6-9 MAD Pass Tool Diagram

User’s Guide 6-15


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

Procedure
1. Make up the bottom half of the probe section
including the two batteries, the DAS, and the MEM.
Insert this part of the probe section into the customer
collar.
2. Place the USMPR in line with the customer collar.
The SRIG and the battery tandem should be made up
to the lower adapter sub. The SRIG should only be
able to make up to the adapter sub one way. The keys
cut on the ends of the SRIG sub are not identical.
3. Make the battery up to the battery tandem then make
up the USMPR to customer collar using chain tongs.
USMPR and customer collar should be picked up as
one lift (approximately 40 feet). Connections for the
3" CDP require 2,500 ft-lb of torque.
4. The Dump port plug can now be removed to begin
tool communications.

Modified Rig Floor Makeup


The tool can be made up entirely on the catwalk given that
space, time, and roustabout assistance is not a limiting
factor. The tool can be inserted into the Monel collar. The
pulser can also be made up to the Monel with pipe
wrenches or chain tongs. A gap will be seen between the
pulser and the Monel if these are new connections. Be sure
to follow the proper procedure for making up new
connections if this is the case. New connections should be
made up using 1/2 the recommended torque of 1,250 ft-lb.
Then break the connection and reapply dope. Now you can
make the connection to 2,500 ft-lb.
After making the pulser to the Monel collar, the crush ring
sub can be installed to the bottom of the Monel. Carefully
orient the crush ring sub so that the groove is facing
downhole. The crush ring sub should be put on the Monel
after inserting the probe and pulser so that the edge of the
EEJ and so it can be collapsed to allow the crush ring to fit

6-16 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

into the groove.


The MPR can now be made up to the crush ring sub by
bypassing the need for the blank sub. Once the entire tool
is made up, communications should be established through
the dump port to ensure that the tool is working properly.
It is important to remember that the tool is powered up and
is draining battery power.
The tool can be picked up like a long collar but space
considerations should have already been determined since
the tool is 46 feet long. Assembling the tool is this manner
is more difficult for the operator, but will save rig time.

User’s Guide 6-17


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

Orienting to the Motor


This procedure is carried out after a successful verification
and is the last thing that is done before the tool is run in the
hole for a shallow test.
1. While the tool is on the catwalk, set the DAS to
highside. Confirm that DAS is at highside by running
“Test Verification” within DSeries. Transfer the
highside mark to the top face of the Alignment Block
on the pulser (or the side of the UP) from the DAS
and not the big tab on the pulser. (Refer to page 4-7
and the NaviTrak Hardware User’s Guide
(P/N 750-500-056) for further information).
2. Make a legible mark along the whole tool from the
bottom of EEJ to Top of the pulser using white paint,
Tipex, whiteout, or similar product. If you are using a
UP pulser, then note the offset from this mark to the
Pulser's highside mark.
3. If you are using a NaviTrak pulser, once the probe is
in the drill collar, the mark on the pulser can be
physically turned to the mud motor scribeline using a
special orientation tool. Or it can be set to one of the
lock down screw holes and measured as an Internal
Tool Correction.

Table 6-1 Screw Torques

Alignment Sub Allen Screw Torque

4-3/4 & 6-3/4 in. OD 150-175 ft-lb


7-3/4 & 8-1/4 in. OD 230-270 ft-lb

4. If you are using an UP Pulser the offset should be


measured with a tape measure or a protractor to get

6-18 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

the correction factor which must be entered in the


computer.

CAUTION:
Failure to enter this correction in the computer can
result in drilling the hole in the wrong direction!

Laying out the Tool


Note: If possible, get the driller to drain the motor
if he insists on removing the bit before
letting you run the post-run verification.

1. Pick-up to the MPR sub, plug into the tool, and Air
Hang the tool. PowerComms will indicate whether it
has detected the presence of battery power or not. If
there is no voltage, it is recommended that the probe
section be laid out rather that attempting to
communicate with the Cowbell cables on the rig
floor. This will prevent any accidental shorting from
occurring.
If suitable power is applied and there is some node
communication but not all, carefully break the
connection between the Flex sub and the MPR sub
after powering down. Insert the Cowbell cable into
either wet connection. Use PowerComms cabling
either from the memory dump port or the phono
connection on the Cowbell cable to establish
communications. If this is unsuccessful, then lay out
the tool. Call your local Technical Support or
coordinator for further instructions.

User’s Guide 6-19


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

2. Dump and set the tool up for the next run.

CAUTION:
Dump Port Plug & O-ring:
Care should be used when installing or removing
the dump port plug. The O-ring is susceptible to
damage from the snap ring groove. After installing
the dump port plug, the snap ring groove should be
inspected for any signs of O-ring material and
thoroughly cleaned. It may be necessary to use the
brass tools located in the support kit
(P/N 790-000-089) or (P/N 704-500-141, 3-1/8"
tool) to properly inspect this groove. If it is
suspected that any O-ring material is in the groove
then the port plug should be removed. The O-ring
should be lubricated with DC-4 and replaced (O-
ring P/N 728-000-193). Reinstall the dump port
plug.

Pick-up to the connection below the lower Flex sub


and BHA. Break this connection to allow mud to
drain out if it has not been done. Make this
connection back up. While this is going on the
memory data can be processed. The memory module
should not be initialized until all the data has been
correctly dumped and the data is analyzed for failed
transmitters or receivers.
3. Break the connection between the MPR sub and the
Upper flex sub. Pick-up the Monel far enough away
so that the EEJ is not in the way. Clean out the box
stab area of the MPR sub, then insert the Blank sub.
Cleaning the Male 3-1/8" Pin
Anytime the tool has been below the rotary table and
the break between the wet stab sub and the Pin sub is
being made the Male stab connector should be

6-20 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

cleaned and inspected. This inspection is done by


breaking the connection between the wet stab sub
and the Upper Adapter Sub (UAS). Once this
connection is broken, the wet stab sub should be
removed and the male stab cleaned and inspected.
To clean the male stab, all visible debris should be
removed and the stab should be wiped down with a
clean rag or cloth. Then the stab should be sprayed
with CRC Electoclean. Next a thin film of DC-4
should be applied. All O-rings should be replaced
and back up rings should be inspected and replaced
if necessary. After the male stab has been
appropriately cleaned the wet stab sub should be
torqued back on. Remember the correct torque for a
3" CDP connection is 2,500 ft-lb.

CAUTION:
If this sub is put on upside down, extreme wash and
tool damage will occur ruining the UAS sub. The
correct orientation of this sub is serial band down.
The serial band on the wet stab sub should be
downhole.

4. Lower the collar assembly with the probe inside and


back down within reach, remove the Split Ring
Centralizer, Spacer, and Crush Ring (do not reuse
the Crush Rings unless your local Technical Support
dictates otherwise). Clean out the EEJ thoroughly
and insert the plug if available (otherwise use tape to
seal the connection). Push the EEJ into the Blank sub
recess, then lower the assembly down and make up
the connection between the Upper flex sub and
Blank sub and the Blank sub/MPR connection.
5. Lower down to the Pulser, remove the anchor bolts,
and pull the probe up to the ESB.

User’s Guide 6-21


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

6. Use the Base Plate to secure the probe


(see Figure 6-1) into position. Remove the set screws
(pins), and lift the probe up high enough to
disconnect the Bendix connector. Remove the probe
and lay out to change the batteries. Cover the
exposed connection on the lower half of the probe
with the dummy Apollo head or End Cap.

Note: If this is simply a turnaround to change the


batteries, put the Finger Protector on the
lower section of the probe (still in the collar)
in preparation for making up the top half of
the probe. If laying out the bottom half of the
probe, put the fishing head/lifting cap on it
and extract the probe from the collar.
Before laying out this section of the probe,
make sure to compress the expansion joint
of the EEJ and then tape it.

7. When laying out the MPR sub, break out the


Alignment sub, Monel collar, and Upper flex sub.
Break the torque between the Blank sub and MPR
sub, but leave these together. DO NOT break the
torque between the MPR sub and the lower Flex sub.
Make sure to replace the spacer ring of the Crush
Ring Assembly back into the MPR box prior to
shipping.

6-22 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

•Notes•

User’s Guide 6-23


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Tool Installation

•Notes•

6-24 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
Chapter 7
Memory Only Services

Chapter 7 covers logging with memory


only for the probe based tools.

Logging with Memory Only


Note: The memory only tool installation was
covered in Chapter 6.

Under certain circumstances a “memory only” service can


be provided for the client. This is only a very basic
explanation of the process.

Note: The procedure of configuring the tool not to


pulse is to save life on the battery that would
otherwise be used by the tool when it pulses.
As a consequence, no status bits nor any
indication of bad data will be seen at surface
except when the tool is being verified.
Contact your supervisor before running a
tool in the hole setup for this condition.
Normally the tool would be configured to
pulse to obtain a surface test, data, and
status values.

User’s Guide 7-1


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Memory Only Services

Logging While Tripping


SUIT allows you to set up the tool to “Record
continuously”. When SUITing the tool, select the “Record
Continuously” option if you are going to log the hole with
no flow. See Figure 7-1.

Figure 7-1 Mode Switch Recorder Format Options

If drilling is to resume afterwards, the tool can be set up to


pulse in the “Mode switch Telemetry Format Options”
menu as normal. If this is just a Made After Drilling (MAD)
run only, the tool can be setup in the same options menu not
to pulse at all by entering “None” under “survey”.
See Figure 7-2.

7-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Memory Only Services

Figure 7-2 Mode Switch Telemetry Options


This screen shows that the tool is setup not to pulse data to the
surface.

The tool can be checked out as below.

Note: “Run Continuously” starts the process of


storing data to memory irrespective of the
flow state. Selecting this option will not
cause the tool to pulse continuously. If the
tool resets downhole and powers-up again
data will continue to be written to memory.

1. Run Poll to establish communications.


2. Enter DSeries and initialize memories and set the
tool clock.
3. Run the verification procedure.
4. Enter BM or its replacement and ensure Bus activity
is present if the tool has been SUITed to acquire data
continuously.

User’s Guide 7-3


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Memory Only Services

5. Exit and dump the memory file from DSeries. Check


that the files have been opened and that the data for
Gamma Ray, MPR, and directional are good.
6. Enter BM or its replacement and confirm bus
activity. If this is so the Air Hang is over and the tool
can be made ready to go into the hole. Switch off
power at the PowerComms box, and disconnect the
cable.

7-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Memory Only Services

•Notes•

User’s Guide 7-5


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Memory Only Services

•Notes•

7-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
Chapter 8
Quick Reference to Modular MPR

Chapter 8 covers information for rigsite


verification of the 6-3/4 and 8-1/4 inch
MPR systems.

Overview

Required Software
The following software (or later versions) are required:
• Tooltest (Version 7466TH.110)
• DSeries (Version 77466TB.103)
• Busmon
• SUIT (Version 77082R0500 or later)
• Memtobin.exe TL103 dated 5/29/97 or later
• MPRRes.TAB dated 5/20/97 or later
• MPRCALC 3.03 or later

Note: When using a DrillByte surface system with


8-1/4 inch MPR tools, check that DrillByte
2.31 TD or later has been installed.
DrillByte will require the definition file
77249ud.d08 and the appropriate telemetry
formats. Make sure that the Master.uft file
has been edited to include these changes.

User’s Guide 8-1


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

Quick Operating Procedures


The purpose of this chapter is to provide a basic guideline
of the rigsite hardware and software setup and procedures
that can be referred to quickly. This chapter is intended to
be a quick reference only, and assumes the operator has
cabin operations, Tooltest, SUIT, and some MPR
experience. Where more detail is required, readers will be
prompted to the relevant sections in preceding chapters.

In the Crate
1. Do a visual inspection of all the subs making sure the
modular ring connections are not damaged. Retrieve
the paperwork off the tools and determine which is
the primary and backup tool.
2. Strap and OD and ID the primary and backup tools. It
is critical that the SRIG sub OD/ID be measured for
GRAPI calibration factor. Note the measurements.
3. Connect the entire system using Comm. caps and
RCA cables for the primary tool.

Note: Once the primary tool has been configured,


confirm communications and SUIT, if
appropriate, the backup tool.

4. Hook-up the PowerComms and plug into the DCC


sub. (See Chapter 4 for cable hookup diagrams).

8-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

Surface System Procedures

DSeries Setup
1. Select units- Metric or English.
2. In Drillstring Components:
• Use the DDS for the SRIG Inclination
• Use NaviGamma for the SRIG gamma sensor
• Use MPR for the resistivity type

Note: The Gamma ray correction factor is found


on the chart by taking the OD - ID = x; then
find “x” in the chart and the corresponding
GRAPICF. Always measure the subs for
OD’s and ID’s. to get the correct gamma
ray correction factor.

The nominal measurements are:

Table 8-1 Nominal Measurements

8-1/4 inch MPR 6-3/4 inch MPR

OD = 8.25 inch OD = 6.75 inch


ID = 4.00 inch ID = 3.50 inch

3. For MPR sensors, input the base air offsets (from


paperwork supplied with the resistivity sub) into the

User’s Guide 8-3


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

“Resistivity sub editing” table in the BHA


components option in DSeries. See Figure 8-1.

Figure 8-1 DSeries Screen

4. In Bottom Hole Assemblies, configure the BHA from


the subs entered in the drillstring component list. The
toolface correction is only relevant when using
nuclear tools with an offset density sub and for the
toolface offset between the MWD and motor.

Note: The sensor offsets are “bit to sensor”.

5. Enter the mud correction factors for Resistivity and


Gamma when appropriate.
6. Run Tooltest (in DSeries run “Test Verification”) to
check your communications with all nodes and to get
part numbers for all nodes. Page down the data
screens for a quick check to see if nodes are
responding with valid data. See Figure 8-2.

8-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

Figure 8-2 Tooltest Screen

The screen display in this figure shows the results


when the non-I.S. cable is hooked to the tool. When
the I.S. cable is connected and both Comm. ports are
used “Direct 2” appears instead of Echo 1.
7. Make sure the Surface decoding systems clock and
the DSeries resident computer clock are at the same
time before initializing the memory. (It is good
practice to keep a backup watch set to the same time
in case the surface system fails).
8. Start DSeries, initialize the memories, and cycle
power to the tool. If time allows, let the tool run for a
few minutes. Dump the memories and use
MEMVIEW to check each file for reasonable data
and non-zero errors. The gamma ray data will vary
from location to location but should be relatively low
(@ 5 cps).
9. If circumstances permit, perform a Crane Hang
verification to compare Crane Hang values to
calibration sheet values (see Chapter 5-1). Use
Comm. caps and stereo cables for this procedure.

User’s Guide 8-5


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

SUITing the Tool


See configurations at the end of the chapter.

Sensor to Bit Offsets


Take the middle of the Receiver Antennas as the reference
point because this point will never change no matter how
many times the subs are re-cut. Therefore, to get your
sensor to bit offsets, if the paperwork with the tool does not
show them, then:
1. Measure the distance from the bottom of the SRIG to
the middle of the Receiver Antennas for the
resistivity sensor offset.
2. Subtract 6.8 ft. (2.0 m) from the resistivity offset for
the gamma sensor offset.
3. Subtract 5.1 ft. (1.5 m) from the resistivity offset for
the inclination sensor.

Picking-up the Tool


1. Unstrap the tools in the crate.
2. Wrap two stranded wire cables around each end of
the tool and lift to the rig floor with the crane. Ensure
that the cables are not wrapped around the antennas.
Use guiding ropes and the assistance of two
roustabouts to ensure that the tool does not hit any
vertical obstruction as it is picked up. (The tools are
not protected against non-axial shocks). Always
supervise this procedure.
3. Use the Modular Lift Sub to screw the MPR sub to
the BHA. The Modular Lift Sub is needed because
the connections have NC-46 or NC-61 threads and
the Modular Ring has a positive upset. The Lift sub,
lifting bail, and thread protectors all have grooves cut
in the shoulder to accommodate for the upset of the
Modular Ring.

8-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

Note: Ensure the connections have been


lubricated with Lubriplate.

User’s Guide 8-7


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

Modular Connection
One of the features of the Modular Tool System is the
ability to add or remove sensor subs simply by making-up
or breaking-out the connection between subs. The Modular
Tool connection (see Figure 8-3) provides the standard
mechanical connection as well as the electrical connection
simultaneously. The electrical connector is an electrically
isolated contact ring installed in a groove in the shoulder of
the drill collar connection. The pin and box of Modular
subs have identical contact rings. These contact rings
protrude slightly from the shoulder surface ensuring
positive contact at the connection. Use only special thread
protectors on modular connections. The contact depends
on the O-ring and metal-to-metal sealing action of the
shoulder to protect the contact from mud contamination.

Single Wire MT Bus

Lende
Seal

Collar

Contact
Ring

Figure 8-3 Modular Ring Connection

Note: The pin connections of the stainless steel


subs are electroplated with nickel and

8-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

copper to prevent galling. Therefore, the use


of conductive lubricants is prohibited. This
plating is extremely thin and the use of
abrasive materials and steel brushes must
be avoided when cleaning the connections.

1. Carefully clean both shoulders of the modular


connection. The use of abrasive materials and steel
brushes must be avoided when cleaning the
connections.
2. Lubricate with non-conductive lubricant
(Lubriplate). Use a thin coating of lubricant on the
shoulder and contact ring.

CAUTION:
Conductive lubricants like Pipe Dope must be
avoided!

3. Apply a small amount of Lubriplate to the pin


threads.
4. Lubricate the threads of the box moderately.
5. Install the three components of the Lende Seal
around the pin of the modular connection. This
should prevent any mud intrusion from the inside.
The Lende Seal consists of two Teflon Rings
surrounding an O-ring. The Lende Seal should be
used on all modular connections and replaced every
time the tool is serviced.
6. Install an O-ring in the O-ring groove after coating it
with 111 lubricant. This will help prevent
contamination of the modular ring. Use the stabbing
guide to position the pin of the DCC in the box of the
MPR. A paper towel covering the shoulders of the
connection will keep it clean. Damaging the modular
ring by not using the stabbing guide ring could easily

User’s Guide 8-9


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

result in a M-30 communications failure. If there is a


Lende Seal on the pin of the modular tool then
remove the outermost ring.
The make-up torque for collar based MWD
connections:

Table 8-2 Make-up Torques

Size (inch) Torque

6-3/4" (Mod NC-46) 23,500 ft-lb (31,862 n-m)


8-1/4" (Mod NC-61) 38,500 ft-lb (52,200 n-m)
6-3/4" (4-1/2 in. I.F. API) 27,500 ft-lb (37,285 n-m)
8-1/4" (6-5/8 in. Reg.) 45,000 ft-lb (61,012 n-m)

Any contamination in the connection may result in a loss of


communication between the MTC and one or more of the
modular subs. Under perfect conditions there is significant
signal loss due to the combination of line resistance and
capacitance in the MT Bus.
Improperly cleaning the connections may result in tool
failure.

8-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

Rig Floor Verification Procedures


Ensure that, prior to the MPR tool being picked-up,
communication to the tool has been established, that the
SWWP has been SUITed, that memory files have been
opened after initialization and that surface system has been
setup with the correct telemetry format. Ensure that an Air
Hang verification has been made as a data quality
assurance in the event that you do not get a good rig floor
verification.

Summary of Events

Overview
This short section details the sequence of events the
operator should consider while running the verification on
the rig floor. (For more detail see Chapter 5-2).
Poll
• to confirm communications
DSeries
• initialize memories
• run verification
• dump and view the data
• all RAW data is consistent

Detailed Procedures
1. Hook-up the PowerComms equipment and plug into
the DCC sub (remember to call the Pod first before
plugging into the sub).
2. Enter DSeries and initialize the memories and cycle
power to the tool.
3. Run Busmon for 3 minutes while acquiring data.
View the files being opened and the Bus activity.

User’s Guide 8-11


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

4. Run the “Pre-Run Verification” in DSeries. Page


down the data screens for a quick check to see if
nodes are responding with valid data. Store to disk
and then print out a copy of the verification.
The rule of thumb for accessing the quality of data is
as follows (see the Verification Sheet on page 8-14):
• 4 compensated phases within ± 0.1 degree of
the Air Hang.
• 4 compensated attenuation within ± 0.1 dB of
the Air Hang.
Additionally, the values for Phase Difference and
Amplitude Ratio are to fall within the following
ranges for the modular MPR tools.
T1T2, 2 MHzT1T2, 400 kHz
PHASE LONG -0.25 to +0.75 deg. PHASE LONG -0.5
to +0.5 deg.
ATTN LONG +5.3 to +5.7 dB. ATTN LONG +5.3
to +5.7 dB.
T3T4, 2MHzT3T4, 400 kHz
PHASE SHORT +0.3 to +1.3 deg. PHASE SHORT -
0.3 to +0.7 deg.
ATTN SHORT +8.2 to +8.6 dB. ATTN SHORT
+8.2 to +8.6 dB
Also check that the differences between the
attenuation values for each pair of transmitters at the
same frequency are close. For example, Atten. T1R2
should be within ± 3 dB of T2R1. If it is not check
with the office before running.
Check the SRIG gamma and inclination values.
Gamma will vary depending on location but should
be about 5 cps offshore.
5. Dump the memories and check the data. Note any
time offset (there should not be any). If there is a
major difference, repeat the process to confirm that

8-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

either the clock in the tool or computer is not


performing, then call your local Technical Support.
6. Orient to the mud motor, record the offset into
DSeries then run in the hole.

Turnaround Between Runs


1. Check surface online and offline computer clocks. If
different then set the offline clock to the online clock
time.
2. Plug into the DCC sub and establish
communications with PowerComms. (Remember to
call the Pod before inserting the cable in the Dump
Port if using the PowerComms system).
3. Start DSeries and run Tool Verification to check for
communication with all nodes and get part numbers
for all nodes. This will initiate sensor verification.
Page down through the data screens to assess the
tool’s performance. Print out a copy of the
verification. Check to see that the verification is
within specifications.
4. Dump memories.

CAUTION:
Record the files sizes and the clock offset if any. If
the clock offset is excessive then notify your
supervisor. This may be indicative of a memory
problem. Apply the timing offsets with the same
sign as displayed when the memories were
dumped.

5. Backup the memory data to floppy disk and backup


data to hard disk.

User’s Guide 8-13


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

6. Start processing the data to ensure the data has been


properly dumped.

Note: As part of the log quality control process,


you are to look at the unaveraged raw data
to check for inconsistencies in transmitter/
receiver operation. Remember that the
compensation process can hide transmitter
failures. An example M-Plot screen is shown
in Figure 8-4. This can be modified to
highlight either receiver or individual
failures. All 32 RAW curves should be
viewed and any PD or AR curves before
final processing.

Figure 8-4 M-Plot Screen

7. Once the data has been dumped completely and the


first processing pass made to confirm the quality of
the data, the data can be reprocessed as normal. At
this point, you can initialize the memories before the
next run. However, if processing the data is taking
time before the data can be checked, then the
memories can be initialized prior the verification on
the next run.

8-14 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

8. Prior to verification on the next run, check the


surface clocks then initialize the memory and
prepare to go in the hole for the next run.

SUITing the Collar Based MPR Tool


After establishing communications, run SUIT. Note that
earlier configuration files from previous versions of SUIT
are not compatible. If you are unfamiliar with SUIT get
advice from the office before continuing any further.

Note: Prior to uploading the configuration from


the tool, load a default configuration
(suit.cnf) from the disk. View the
configuration then upload from the tool.
View again and note the change in the
configuration file. Save this file before
making any changes.

Note: As this service is being continually updated,


current telemetry/recorder files will change.
Review the available files with your
supervisor/Technical Support to get the
most up-to-date versions.

1. Start SUIT and download the shop configuration


from the SWWP and save. If a suitable configuration
file is not available, set up the SUIT configuration to
meet the job needs.
2. Save the configuration, program the SWWP, and
exit the program. Never save over the default
suit.cnf.

Note: All 8-1/4 inch MPR jobs need the definition


file 77249ud.d08 or later in the surface
system and in the offline computer
“Master.uft” files with MSS or DrillByte.
Edit the Master.uft file so that the correct
definition file is recognized. (As a reminder,

User’s Guide 8-15


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

the 77249ud.*** file has to be on the first


line in the Master.uft file and be present
either in the SUIT or UFT directories).

Note: Use the following configuration as an


example. It is likely that by the time this
document is released that the 77249ud.***
file will have changed. It is imperative that
the operator determines from local
Technical Support what the current file is
and the set SUIT configuration procedures.

8-16 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

Example of DrillByte/MSS MPR SUIT


Configuration
What follows is a description of a standard SUIT
configuration file for a collar based tool. This can be
approximately modified depending on local conditions.

SUIT SHORT REPORT Report Date: 16-Nov-99


SUIT Version: 77082TE510

UFT Name: Universal Format Table. Release 1.18


UFT Master Part No: 77249UDD11
UFT DD Part No : 77249DDD11 UFT Date: 13 September 1995 2:00
PM
UFT Description:
This is the current release of the Universal Format Table.
Author: Rick DiPersio

SUIT Configuration Report Source: Disk: 4mprb-ap.cnf


Cfg Info: 4 -3/4" MPR with Annular Pressure - Flowswitch -
RPM downlink.

SWWP ID: 0001

SUIT Program Info:


Date: 16-Nov-99
Time: 080231
Operator ID: HST - Suit5te
Operator Capability Level: 1
Site/Location: Lafayette
SUIT Version: 77082TE510

Mode Switch Variables:


Data Rate and Modulation Type #1: 2X Split Phase
Data Rate and Modulation Type #2: 2 Sec Adv Combinatorial
Data Rate and Modulation Type #3: 1.5 Sec Adv Combinatorial
Data Rate and Modulation Type #4: 1 Sec Adv Combinatorial
Default Data Rate/Modulation: #3
Telemetry Format: 4MPRB_AP
Recorder Format: 4MPR_D
Recorder Subsequence Number: 0

User’s Guide 8-17


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

SWWP/DAS Recorder: Run continuously


Directional Node Parameters:
SWWP PARAMETERS:
Short Averaged Data: 1200 (6.00 Seconds)
Medium Averaged Data: 2 (12.00 Seconds)
Long Averaged Data: 6 (36.00 Seconds)
Rotation Threshold (RPM): 15
Rotation Evaluation Time (Seconds): 10
Number of RPM Data Buffers: 1
SWWP/DAS PARAMETERS:
Flow-Off Surveys: Enabled
Flow Detection: Flow Switch/Battery
Flow On Limit : 0.0160000
Flow Off Limit: 0.0110000
Acquisition Mode: Long
Short Mode Rotation State: Not Rotating
Sensor Warm_Up Time (Seconds): 1.5
Initial Acquisition Delay Time (Sec): 10
Long Mode Acquisition Period (Sec): 20.0
MPT Subsequence Data:
Rotating Mode Survey Sequence Non-Rotating Mode Survey
Sequence
Entry Survey Name Repeat Entry Survey Name Repeat
1 AR 1 1 ANR 1
2 DR 3 2 CNR 3
3 None 0 3 None 0
4 None 0 4 None 0
5 None 0 5 None 0
6 None 0 6 None 0
7 None 0 7 None 0
8 None 0 8 None 0
Loop Back Entry #: 1 Loop Back Entry #: 1
Loop Back Delay (minutes): 0

Initial Preamble Length (# of Bits): 14


Intermediate Preamble Length (# of Bits):12
Initial Valve Off Time (Seconds): 60
Intermediate Valve Off Time (Seconds): 15
SWWP/DAS pulse skew value in milliseconds: 100

Adv Combinatorial M-in-N Table: FAST


High Inclination Threshold (Degrees): 3.00000

8-18 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

Recorder Format Controls:


Recorder Format: 4MPR_D
Subsequence Number : 0

RECORDER MEM Node INIT UPDATE MAX FILE CMD


LOG
FILENAME 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DELAY RATE RECORD SIZE EXT
MODE
______ _______________ ______ _______ ______ _____ ___ ____
DirSD F c c c c c c c 35.0 180.0 0 0 1 B
DirSU F c c c c c c c 36.0 180.0 0 0 1 B
DirRPM F c c c c c c c 34.0 20.0 0 0 N/A B
DirSSLIP F c c c c c c c 40.0 40.0 0 0 N/A B
DirTEMP F c c c c c c c 37.0 60.0 0 0 2 B
Mpr24RAW F c c c c c c c 30.0 10.0 0 0 1 B
NapPRES F c c c c c c c 30.0 20.0 0 0 2 B
SrgGA F c c c c c c c 31.0 12.5 0 0 5 B
DirERR F c c c c c c c 0.0 0.0 0 2048N/A B
GamERR F c c c c c c c 0.0 0.0 0 2048N/A B
MprERR F c c c c c c c 0.0 0.0 0 2048N/A B
NapERR F c c c c c c c 0.0 0.0 0 2048N/A B
Downlink Parameters:

High RPM Limit: 200 RPM


Middle RPM Limit: 50 RPM
Low RPM Limit: 15 RPM

Initial Time Interval: 90 Seconds


Intermediate Time Interval Minimum: 150 Seconds
Intermediate Time Interval Maximum: 210 Seconds
Final Time Interval: 90 Seconds

User’s Guide 8-19


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference to Modular MPR

•Notes•

8-20 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
Appendix A
Dual Battery Operations

Appendix A is a reproduced memo


explaining Dual Battery operations.

Dual PDM (DPDM)


Note: See Appendix B for more detail. The Dual
Pulser Driver Module has not been fully
applied as originally designed (see the
paragraph below entitled Modified
Tandem). When the DPDM works as
intended, it will operate in the following
manner.

When using the DPDM with dual batteries, depletion starts


with the top battery and when that is drained the DPDM
switches over to the bottom one after the pumps have been
cycled. If the run lasts no longer than 20 amp-hours, the
lower battery can be run again. However, move the bottom
battery to the top, putting a fresh one on the bottom for the
second run. If battery usage is greater than 20 amp-hours,
determine the length of the next run before using the lower
battery again. When the first battery is drained, the DPDM
will pulse a reset pattern indicating that the pumps have to
be cycled in order to switch to the second or lower battery.
After the voltage drops below 21 volts, the DPDM
monitors 254 pulses before it will start its reset sequence.
This consists of a sequence of 6 cycles (approximately 10
seconds open, 10 seconds closed) followed by a continuous
sequence of 60 seconds open and 10 seconds closed. This

User’s Guide A-1


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Dual Battery Operations

pattern is easily recognized. The DPDM differs from the


older NaviGamma PDM as it has more actuations. Reset
pattern for the DPDM is 1 reset and 8 actuations at 10
second intervals. The PDM has 1 reset and 6 actuations at
6-1/2 second intervals.
To check the battery for continuity, in the absence of a Mud
Box, check the battery for continuity, test between pins 4
and 10 at the uphole end and as a separate test check
between pins 9 on the uphole end and pin 2 on the
downhole end. To check for voltage when both batteries
are connected, use pin 4 as ground and check the voltage
on pin 2 (@ 35 volts) and the voltage on pin 9 (@ 35 volts).
This is just a quick summary of Dual Battery operations.
Tool assembly is normal with the addition of a second
battery and tandem. All PDMs and Batteries now being
manufactured are Dual Battery capable.
The PDM contains an additional PCB and uses different
firmware in the PDM PCB. This is backward compatible
with single batteries.

Battery Pack
Pin 10 is now connected to ground, and pin 2 from the
bottom is routed to pin 9 at the top to connect the lower
battery through to the PDM. Standard batteries had these
pins open, so checking for this is one way of confirming a
battery is dual or not. The intention of the design is to begin
operating off one battery, the upper, possibly partially
depleted battery until the voltage drops to a certain level.
Once the PDM microprocessor detects this low voltage
(< 21 volts), it will continue to monitor the voltage until
254 counts (pulse transitions) of low voltage have been
seen. At this point, the PDM will ignore DAS commands
and switch the secondary battery into parallel with the
primary and send a sequence of 6 cycles (approximately 10
seconds open, 10 seconds closed), followed by a
continuous sequence of 60 seconds open and 10 seconds
closed. This is easily recognizable on the chart recorder.

A-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Dual Battery Operations

Refer to Figure A-1.

60 sec.
10 s 10 s

Figure A-1 DPDM Reset Sequence

At each of these 60 second intervals the PDM monitors the


flow line. Cycling the pumps will be necessary to return
control to the DAS and restart normal data transmission.
On tripping out of the hole, if a battery switch has been
seen, then the top depleted battery should be removed from
the toolstring, the secondary battery moved up and a new
battery placed in the lower position.
The implementation of dual battery operation will achieve
three aims:
1. Allow the NaviTrak tool to remain downhole for a
longer period of time, with the increased use of PDC
bits. This is important as it is possible to drill a
complete lateral section of a horizontal well without
tripping for a bit change.
2. By changing out the depleted battery on the next trip,
moving the newer battery up into its position and
picking up a new battery, full utilization of batteries
will be achieved.

User’s Guide A-3


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Dual Battery Operations

3. Provide a power source for the 4-3/4 in. NaviTrak


with MPR system until the alternator becomes
available.

A-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Dual Battery Operations

•Notes•

User’s Guide A-5


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Dual Battery Operations

•Notes•

A-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
Appendix B
Quick Reference Guide

Appendix B covers information for


checking out the 3-1/8 & 4-3/4 inch MPR
system prior to shipping and quick
operating procedures at the rigsite.

Overview
The next series of pages are a set of guidelines that can be
used as prompts in assembling, communicating, picking up
the probe based system. Ideally these pages can be
photocopied and laminated or double-sided then laminated
to fit within a Tally book back cover. Lack of space or
lifting equipment on some locations may cause you to
change the sequence, etc. Be aware that if you change the
basic operational procedures you may inadvertently cause
yourself a problem. If you are unsure how to progress, then
always call your local Technical Support.

User’s Guide B-1


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

3-1/8 & 4-3/4 in. (Ultra Slim & Navi-MPR)


Primary Rig-up Checklist
1. Inventory
• MPR Surface Kit
• Probe Modules (noting serial #s)
• Collars & Subs (noting serial #s)
2. Measure
• Collars & Subs (OD, ID, lengths, Wearband ODs)
• Probe Modules
3. Calculate
• Spacer tandem lengths
• Sensor offsets (note magnetic spacing limitations for DAS)
• Select restrictor (run hydraulics calculations, if using a NaviTrak
Pulser)
4. Build Primary & Backup Tools
• Check O-rings and backup rings on tandems
• Measure battery voltages
• Build in sections and locate in a safe area
- Pulser & DM
- Mod Tandem, Battery, Mod Tandem, Battery, ESB, Battery
- ESB, FS, Tandem, DAS, Tandem, MEM, EEJ
(Note: 3-1/8" tool will only use 2 batteries.)
5. SUIT DAS
• Use cabin based or battery power
• Simulate flow
• Dump data and analyze
• If full tool is assembled at this point, then tap test
6. Establish Comms w/MPR
• Either by itself or with full probe assembled
• Crane hang MPR subs
7. Entire System Check
• Connect entire probe with MPR via Cowbell cable
• Rig-up MSS porting cable assembly to on-line system
• Fix ROD over POD’s pulse light
• Simulate flow by tapping on the flow switch
• Monitor transmitted data on online systems for the correct word
sequences and types.

B-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

8. MWD Sub Torque Specifications


• 3-1/8 in. (3" CDP) = 2,500 ± 200 ft-lb
• 4-3/4 in. (3-1/2 I.F.) = 8,845 ± 400 ft-lb
• 6-3/4 in. (4-1/2 I.F.) = 27,500 ft-lb
• 6-3/4 in. (NC 46) = 23,500 ft-lb
• 8-1/4 in. (6-5/8 in.) Reg = 45,000 ft-lb
• 8-1/4 in. (6-5/8 in. Mod) = 38,500 ft-lb
ft-lb x 1.35582 = n-m
9. Probe Hydraulics Limitations
• Max AV = 50 ft/sec
• Pulse Height:
max @ tool = 650 psi
recommended = 250 psi
10. Hole Sizes
• 3-1/8 in. = 3-3/4 - 5-7/8 in. (95-149 mm)
• 4-3/4 in. = 5-7/8 - 6-3/4 in. (150-172 mm)
• 6-3/4 in. = 8-1/2 - 9-7/8 in. (216-251 mm)
• 8 1/4 in. = 10-3/8 - 17 in. (264-433 mm)
11. Dogleg Severity
• 3-1/8 in. = Rot. 20 deg/100 slid 45 deg/100
• 4-3/4 in. = Rot. 12 deg./100 slid 30 deg./100
• 6-3/4 in. = Rot. 9 deg./100 slid 16 deg./100
• 8-1/4 in. = Rot. 9 deg./100 slid 16 deg./100
12. Flow Range
NaviTrak:
• 4-3/4 in. = 100-350 gpm (380-1,325 lpm)
• 6-3/4 in. = 200-800 gpm (760-3,030 lpm)
• 8-1/4 in. = 300-1,100 gpm (1,135-4,165 lpm)
Universal Pulser:
• 3-1/8 in. (40 mm) = 80-160 gpm (302-605 lpm)
• 4-3/4 in. (49 mm) = 160-320 gpm (606-1,211 lpm)
(47 mm) = 160-220 gpm (606-833 lpm)
• 6-3/4 in. (52 mm) = 300-675 gpm (1,136-2,555 lpm)
(50 mm) = 300-450 gpm (1,136-1,703 lpm)
• 8-1/4 in. (54 mm) = 400-900 gpm (1,514-3,407 lpm)
(53 mm) = 400-600 gpm (1,514-2,271 lpm)
9-1/2 in. (XX mm) = 600-1,350 gpm (2,271-5,100 lpm)
(XX mm) = 600-900 gpm (2,271-3,407 lpm)
13. LCM/Sand
• NaviTrak/1%
F to M Nut plug
No fiber
New pulser 30 lb/bbl premix

User’s Guide B-3


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

• Universal Pulser
F to M Nut plug
No fiber
40 lb/bbl premix
• Collar/1%
F to M Nut plug
30 lb/bbl premix
14. Operating Temperature
• 3-1/8 in. = 302°F (150°C)
• 4-3/4 in. = 302°F (150°C)
• w/ Teleco collar
6-3/4 - 8-1/4 in. = 257°F (125°C)
• w/ probe M-30 crossover
6-3/4 - 8-1/4 in. = 302°F (150°C)
15. Pressure
• All tools = 20,000 psi (1,378 bar)

B-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

4-3/4 in. MPR Assembly Check List

1. Inventory probe modules, collars, and


subs
• Measure probe modules and note serial #
• Measure (OD, ID lengths) collars and subs
• Note battery serial # and voltages
2. Calculate spacing and restrictor size
• Extend the EEJ by no more than 8 in. and no less than 2 in.
3. Assemble primary tool, then backup tool
• Check O-rings and backup rings
• Note battery voltages and numbers
• Depending on space, assemble tool completely or in sections.
If sections:
a. Pulser & PDM
b. Mod. Tan, Bat, Mod. Tan, Bat
ESB Bat
c. ESB, FS, Tan, DAS, Tan, MEM,
EEJ
• Ensure that the base plate can be inserted around the lower
tandem on the bottom battery.
4. SUIT tool (primary, then backup)
5. Whole tool assembly
• Pulsing/current data can be monitored with Mud Box/
PowerComms between PDM/top Mod Tandem
• Wait for power-up reset pattern to finish before tap testing or
running comms. software
• Tap test the tool fully assembled prior to picking it up
6. Prior to picking-up the tool
• Ensure that restrictor is located below the Alignment Block
• Highside mark has been transferred up to the Alignment Block
• All tandem connections have been bolted together
• Measure the Internal Tool Correction (ITC) by aligning the UP
scribeline to highside and running Poll. The value appears in
the HSTF box is your ITC.
• EEJ extension has been taped closed and plugged
• Tool has been successfully tap tested
• Slip-a-Vator is secured/located

User’s Guide B-5


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

4-3/4 in. MPR Programming the Tool

1. Assemble the primary tool, then backup tool


• Check O-rings and backup rings.
• Note battery voltages and numbers
• Depending on space, assemble tool completely or in sections.
If sections:
a. Pulser & PDM
b. Mod Tan, Bat, Mod Tan, Bat, Tan, Bat
c. ESB, FS, ESB, DAS, Tan, MEM, EEJ
• Ensure that the base plate can be inserted around the lower
tandem on the bottom battery
2a. PowerComms with DAS (No MPR and batteries)
• Do not connect Pod to probe
• Call Pod
• Configure for SWWP-DAS
• When successful, attach “Y” cable to Pod and PDM/battery
connection
• Establish Comms
2b. PowerComms with DAS and MPR (No batteries)
• Ensure Cowbell phono connection is capped
• Connect probe to MPR with Cowbell
• Do not connect Pod to MPR
• Call Pod
• Configure for IO 1039
• When successful, attach IO 1039 cable to Pod and MPR dump
port
• Establish Comms.
2c. PowerComms with DAS and MPR with batteries
• Assemble full probe without PDM battery connected
• Ensure Cowbell phono connection is capped
• Connect probe to MPR with Cowbell
• Do not connect Pod to probe
• Call Pod
• Configure for SWWP-DAS
• When successful, attach “Y” cable to Pod and PDM/battery
connection
• Establish Comms.
3. Run Poll
• Verify SWWP P/N for SUIT version
• Verify nodes are present
4. SUITing the Tool
• Download and save configuration from the tool

B-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

• If this is appropriate, edit this configuration or use another


configuration saved on the computer
• Confirm appropriate telemetry, data rate, and memory setup
• Save Configuration file
• Program tool
• Load default configuration from the computer in SUIT
• View default configuration
• Cycle power to the tool
• Load configuration from the tool
• View the contents for accuracy
• Create, View, Print, and Fax Short Form Report
• Exit program
5. Set on-line and offline surface clocks
6. Initialize Memories
7. Simulate Flow for 5 minutes
• Tap test the flow switch
• Use Mud Box
• Use PowerComms Simulator (ROD)
• During this time the tool will be writing data to memory
8. Dump Memories
• Check time offset between tool and computer. If significant, call
the office
• Check contents of files
• Check for the presence of error files
9. Switch power off
10. Disconnect cabling

User’s Guide B-7


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

4-3/4 in. MPR


Catwalk Probe Check with ROD

1. Probe Assembly
• Connect the PowerComms “Y” Bendix cable between the PDM
and top Modified Tandem
• Ensure the phono connection on “Cow Bells” has been capped
and taped
• Using the orange Bendix X-over, attach “Y” Bendix between the
DM and Mod Tandem
2. ROD Porting Cable Assembly
• Run LEMO cable from Hazardous Area Junction Box to Pod on
catwalk
• Plug LEMO cable into ROD
• Place ROD over Pulse light on Pod
3. PowerComms Hardware Cable Configuration
• Connect AC power cable to Power Module
• Connect Com. cables from Power Module to offline computer
• 1 cable necessary for single memory
• 2 cables necessary for redundant memory
• Connect Power Module to Pod
4. Have online computer configured
• Write MSS file from DSeries
5. PowerComms Software Setup
• Start > Programs > INTEQ MSS > MWD PowerComms
• Call Pod (green plug icon)
• Manual > Tool Interface (SWWP/IO1039, SWWP-DAS,
SWWP/M30) > Apply
• Verify voltage (0.00 volts) and current (< 0.08 amps) and plug
into tool
• Start software
6. Software Program
• Select Action in PowerComms
• Select “Run Circulation Simulation Test”
• Monitor data on real-time computer
• After the Run Circulation Simulation Test is started and power is
applied, but before the monitoring is started, wait about 15
seconds so that the DAS can acquire a survey
7. Dump Data from Tool
• Check time offsets. Call office if significant
• Check content of files
• Check for errors

B-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

8. Powerdown PowerComms
• Exit out of tool communication software
• Check for voltage (0.00 volts) or current (< 0.08 amps) at Pod.
• Disconnect PowerComms cable from tool
• Remove “Cowbells” from MPR then EEJ
• Insert plug into EEJ
• Prepare probe section for installation

User’s Guide B-9


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

4-3/4 in. 2 Piece Assembly and Rig Floor Procedures

1. Prior to picking up the tool, the following actions must be done:


• Backup tool checked and configured
• Surface system configured
• Both MPR subs Air Hung
• Restrictor selected (if using a NaviTrak Pulser)
• Probe and MPR tested together
• Full catwalk test performed
• Sensor offsets calculated
• Mag/Accel spacing checked
• Highside checked
• Mud screens/filters to rig floor
2. Assemble the Probe into 2 pieces
• Ensure that the base plate can be inserted around the lower
battery tandem
• Make sure the restrictor is below the Alignment block
• Ensure the EEJ has been closed and taped
• Ensure the wet connect has been plugged off
3. Collar Assembly
•PickuptheMPR/SRIGsubfirstusingtheliftsub;usethecrane
and the elevators and place it into the rotary table carefully
setting the slips and placing “the clamp” around it so it will not
fall
• Pick up the monel using the lift sub, elevators, and crane. Leave
the monel hanging in the derrick
• Make up the Upper Flex Sub (or Pony monel) to the bottom of
the monel and torque to specifications in the mouse hole
• Carefully make up the blank sub to the MPR sub
• Make sure all Connections are torqued to specifications
• Lower this assembly into the hole; set the slips and secure the
clamp. Remove lift sub.
• Do not set the slips on the MPR antenna
• Always use a collar clamp
• Use Lubriplate to dope the pin connections between the MPR and
upper flex sub and the Blank sub
• Torque to 8,845 ± 400 ft-lb
4. Probe Assembly
• Run in the hole to the alignment sub
• Set slips and collar clamp
• Pick up lower section to rig floor
• Fully extend EEJ
• Insert into collar and hang off on the base plate

B-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

• Attach Finger Protector


• Pick up section
• Insert Finger Protector and make up the probe sections
• Verify DAS’s highside before lowering into rotary.
This is your internal Tool correction
• Tap test after 2 min. as the probe is lowered into the collar
• Seat alignment block
5. Crush Ring Assembly
• Break connection at Blank and Flex subs
• Lay out Blank sub
• Pick-up MWD collar
• Extract wet connect
• Remove wet connect plug; clean, and apply a light coat of DC4 to
the inside of the EEJ
• Assemble crush ring assembly
• Clean MPR male pin if necessary
• Ensure crush ring is seated correctly on flex sub tool face
• Make up flex sub/MPR connection by hand
• Ensure gap is between 0.07 and 0.2 in. before torquing
connection
6. Air Hang Procedure
• Do not set slips on antennas or paddles
• Pick up MPR dump port
• Insert communications cable
• Establish communications
• Pick up 15 feet off deck
• Set tool clocks
• Initialize memories
• Allow tool to acquire data for 3-5 minutes if set to Run
Continuously
• Run verification
• Allow tool to acquire data for 3-5 minutes if set to Run
Continuously
• Simulate flow for 2 min. if tool has not been set up to acquire
data continuously (PowerComms only)
• Dump Memory to run #99 and run MEMVIEW to verify data
• Run Poll/Busmon
• Remove power and shut down software
• Extract communications cable and make up the dump plug to the
tool
7. Mud Motor Orientation
• Pick up to the motor scribe line
• Run chalk line to alignment sub

User’s Guide B-11


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

• Check (plenty) that the line is good


• Set slips and collar clamp around the alignment sub
• Orient pulser high side mark to motor scribe line or measure UP
highside offset
• Torque (150-170 ft-lb for 4-3/4" sub) Allen screws when using a
Block Pulser
8. MWD Surface Test
• Run in to first joint of hevi-wate or where appropriate
• Locate and insert hevi-wate mud screens/filters
• Circulate on tool
• Look for at least 1 or more pulses minimum. If possible obtain
resistivity data

B-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

3-1/8" Assembly & Rig Floor Procedures

1. Prior to picking up tool the following must be done:


• Back up tool checked and configured
• Surface system configured
• Both MPR subs Air Hung
• Probe and MPR tested together as a system
• Full catwalk test performed
• Sensor offset calculated
• Highside checked and marked on UP
• Mud screens filters available on rig floor.
2. Assemble Probe
• The probe for USMPR will be 1-3/4"
• The tool must be picked up in one piece
• Ensure that the EEJ is closed and taped and the wet connect
plugged while picking the probe up or while moving it around
• Ensure that the EEJ is fully opened when inserting probe into
monel
3. Collar Assembly
• Pick up the USMPR/SRIG using the lift sub and place it carefully
into the rotary table setting the slips and using a collar clamp
• Pick up the monel with probe pre-loaded if possible
• The crush ring sub and blank sub should be torqued on bottom
• If it is not possible to pick the monel up with the probe already
made up inside, then pick up the monel with the crush ring sub
and blank sub torqued on bottom.
• Make this up to the USMPR
4. Probe Assembly
• Lower the assembly to the top of the monel so the probe can be
inserted if it was not done already
5. Crush Ring Assembly
• Pick the assembly back up to the blank sub. If the probe was
pre-loaded you will already be at this point
• Remove the blank sub
• Extract the wet connect
• Remove the wet connect plug
• Install the crush ring and split ring
• Make up this connection by hand before applying torque
6. Air Hang
• Pick up tool to MPR dump port
• When removing and installing dump port plug care should be
used. Replace the dump port O-ring each time the port is
accessed.

User’s Guide B-13


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

•Pick tool up 15 feet above deck.


•Set tool clocks
•Initialize memories
•Run verification
•Allow tool to collect data for 3-5 minutes if set to run
continuously
• Simulate flow for 2 minutes if tool was not set to run
continuously
• Dump data and check
• Remove power and shut down software
• Extract Comms. cable and make up dump port plug to tool
7. Mud Motor Orientation
• Pick up to the mud motor scribe line
• Run chalk line to alignment sub
• Check (plenty) that the line is good
• Set slips and collar clamp around the alignment sub
• Use protractor to determine offset.
8. MWD Surface Test
• Run in to first joint of hevi-wate or where appropriate
• Locate and insert hevi-wate mud screen/filter
• Circulate on tool
• Look for at least 1 or more pulses minimum. If possible
obtain resistivity data.

B-14 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

4-3/4 in. MPR Turnaround Procedures


Ensure that a replacement battery section has been made-up, fully tested
with serial #s, and voltages noted. Have the backup tool built in sections
and tested in case of failure.
1. Pull out to surface
• Drain mud motor
• Replace the bit
• Run in to MPR to give access to dump port
• Set slips to give access to dump port
2. Air Hang Procedures
• Insert communications cable
• Establish communications
• Pick up 15 feet off the deck
• Run verification
• Dump data, Backup data, and Process memory
• Do not initialize memories at this stage
• Extract communications cable and make up the dump plug to the
tool
3. Crush Ring Disassembly
• Run in the hole to the top of the MPR
• Set slips and collar clamp
• Break connection between MPR and flex sub
• Clean MPR male stab
• Lubricate MPR threads w/Lubriplate
• Make up Blank sub to MPR sub
• Remove crush ring assembly from wet connect
• Thoroughly clean wet connect, apply DC-4, then recess into Flex
sub
• Lubricate the flex sub threads with Lubriplate
• Make up flex sub to Blank sub and torque connections
4. Changing Batteries
• Run in to Alignment Sub or UP
• Set slips and collar clamp
• Remove Allen screws, or breakout UP
• Check pulser inlet/outlet screens for debris (flush if necessary)
• Pick up the probe to the base of the batteries
• Insert base plate around lower tandem
• Unbolt tandem connection at the battery
• Cover exposed Bendix connection
• Attach Finger Protector
• Layout top section
• Replace batteries
• Listen to reset pattern if applicable

User’s Guide B-15


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

• Pick-up upper section to rig floor


• Insert into Finger Protector and then make up probe
• Tap test after as the probe is lowered into the collar
• Seat Alignment Block. Do not secure or makeup UP.
5. Crush Ring Assembly
• Break connection at Blank and Flex subs
• Lay out Blank sub
• Extract wet connect
• Assemble crush ring assembly
• Clean MPR male pin if necessary, and apply DC-4
• Ensure crush ring is seated correctly on flex sub tool face &
lubricate
• Make up flex sub/MPR connection by hand
• Ensure gap is between 0.07 and 0.2 in. before torquing
connection otherwise lay out probe and recalculate spacing
6. Pre-Run Procedures
• Pick-up to MPR dump port
• Insert communications cable
• Establish communications. Run Poll.
• Set surface gear clocks
• Initialize memories
• Simulate flow for 2 min. if tool has not been set up to acquire
data continuously (PowerComms only), or allow tool to acquire
data for 3-5 minutes
• Run Tool Verification
• Simulate flow for 2 min. if tool has not been set up to acquire
data continuously (PowerComms only), or allow tool to acquire
data for 3-5 minutes
• Dump data and check
• Run Busmon
• Extract communications cable and make-up the dump plug to the
tool
7. Mud Motor Orientation
• Pick-up to the motor scribeline
• Run chalk line to alignment sub
• Check (plenty) that the line is good
• Set slips and collar clamp around alignment sub
• Orient pulser highside mark to motor scribeline or measure UP
highside offset
• Torque (150-170 ft-lb) Allen screws
8. MWD Surface Test
• Run in to first joint of hevi-wate or where appropriate
• Locate and insert hevi-wate mud screen/filters

B-16 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

• Circulate on tool
Look for at least 1 or more pulses minimum. If possible, obtain
resistivity data.

User’s Guide B-17


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

MPR Resistivity Checklist

These short notes are meant to act as a guideline to the basic effects that
impact the resistivity measurement. It is a big mistake to assume that an
effect seen at one formation resistivity will be similar to one seen at
another.

“Everything effects everything differently!”


Call your local technical support for assistance
1. Initial Processing
• Initially process unaveraged
• Always look at the raw curves for transmitter/receiver problems
• Note any major time offsets and inform the office
• Always check the error files for time-outs and non zero errors
2 Gamma Ray Processing
• DrillByte (up to 2.31 TC)
• = No Dark Current
• DrillByte (2.31 TD onwards)
• = Gamma Bias on
• MSS = Gamma bias on
3. CRIM Processing - General Rules
confirm policy with local district.
• Apply below 50 ohms
• Produce both CRIM/non CRIM logs above 50 ohms. Note
separation in shales/sands before and after. CRIM will over
correct at high resistivities
• Works well on reservoir rock w/27% φ not too good elsewhere
• CRIM will calculate resistivities for negative dB values
4. Propagation Resistivity General Rules
• are more accurate in conductive formations
• have better vertical resolution in conductive formations
• have better depth of investigation in resistive formations
• SS are less accurate and have a lower range than LS
measurements
5. Effects that cause curve separation
• Adjacent beds
• Anisotropy
• Invasion
• Dielectric constant variations
• Eccentricity
• Range and accuracy
• Poor calibration
• Human error

B-18 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

6. Anisotropic Responses
• Response begins @ 45 degrees relative dip. Maximum at 90
degrees
• Rv > Rpd > Rat > Rh but not always!
• Both curves will generally read higher than in an non anisotropic
environment
• 400 kHz will be less effected than the 2 MHz as it is a lower
frequency
• It can look like resistive invasion but the LS will read less than
the SS
• Raw values resistivities show less separation than PD or AR
resistivities (opposite of invasion)
7. Borehole Effects/Formation Type
These effects influenced by:
• High contrast between formation and drilling mud resistivity
• Salt saturated mud has a significantly negative effect by
inhibiting the propagation of the signal into the borehole
• Little correction for Rpd and Rar in fresh water muds
• With moderately fresh muds the Apparent Resistivity is less than
Corrected Resistivity in large boreholes (> 17-1/2 in.)
• With Conductive boreholes (salty muds) Apparent R is greater
than Corrected R
• Borehole size
• The greater the contrast between the tool’s OD and the borehole
size the greater the correction at high Ra/Rm values
• Borehole correction charts illustrate where effects are greatest
• 400 kHz is less effected than 2 MHz due the magnitude of its
Borehole Rejection
8. Dielectric Effects (see CRIM
processing)
• Largely a function of the formation dielectric permittivity
(i.e., the ability to store a charge)
• Rar typically reads higher than true resistivity
• Rpd reads lower than true resistivity
• Rpd < Rat
• Frequency dependent. Low frequency = high measured constant
9. Eccentricity
• Caused when the tool is no longer centered in the borehole
• Large contrast exists between Rt and Rm
• 400 kHz less effected than 2 MHz
• No predictable curve response
10. Sensor Limitations

User’s Guide B-19


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

MPR calibrated to less or equal to 0.005 dB and 0.05 deg.


2 MHz LS
• Phase Difference
Range: 0.1 to 3,000 ohm-m
Accuracy: ± 1% (0.1 to 50 ohm-m), ± 0.5 mmho (> 25 ohm-m)
• Attenuation
Range: 0.1 to 500 ohm-m
Accuracy: ± 2% (0.1 to 25 ohms),
Vertical Resolution: 8 in. (20 cm) for 90% response in conductive
beds
400 kHz LS
• Phase Difference
Range: 0.1 to 1,000 ohm-m
Accuracy: ± 1% (0.1 to 25 ohm-m)
± 1.0 mmho (> 25 ohm-m)
• Attenuation
Range: 0.1 to 200 ohm-m
Accuracy: ± 5% (0.1 to 10 ohm-m)
± 5.0 mmho (> 25 ohm-m)
• Vertical Resolution: 12 in. (30 cm) for 90% response in
conductive beds
11. Invasion
• Causes separation between curves with different depths of
investigation SS effected before LS
PD effected before AT Raw effected before PD or AT
2 MHz effected before 400 kHz
Vertical resolution limitations may confuse curve order
• At low invasion diameters radial response will cause the curves to
measure higher or lower than Rt or Rm
• In relatively conductive mud filtrate, a positive response will
cause an increase in the apparent conductivity (or decrease in
apparent resistivity) on the log.
The opposite is true for negative radial responses or non
conductive muds.
12. Thin Bed effects/Vertical Resolution
• Resistivity dependent (R shoulder to R formation ratio and
absolute resistivity)
• Effects are less in conductive media (vertical resolution is best
under conductive conditions)
• Caused when the resistivity of adjacent beds influence
measurement of bed that the tool is in
• Shoulder bed effects worse for attenuation measurements and
lower frequency (400 kHz) resistivities

B-20 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

• Corrected using Inversion processing


• PD better than AT
• 2 MHz better than 400 kHz
• SS better than LS
• Order compromised by dipping bed effects
13. Calibration/Human Error
• Check Time offset between real-time and memory
• Check base air offset input
• Compare base air offset cal. values with original cal. values from
Houston
• Check Ktable values with CSC
• Consider reprocessing with simulated failed transmitter if
curve separation is transmitter dependent
• Look for sudden shifts/offsets in data that are not formation
dependent
• Review time based logs
• Compare CRIM/non-CRIM, Borehole corrected/non Borehole
corrected
14. Horizontal Beds
• Effects start @ 60 degrees relative dip
• Look for anisotropy in shales/sands
• Polarization horn effects at min. 10:1 resistivity contrasts will
vary in order and magnitude depending on absolute resistivity
• Curve order frequency and spacing, formation/porosity/
permeability/Sw dependent
15. Archie Equations

FRw
Sw = ---------
Rt

Rw
Rt = --------------
-
m n
Φ Sw

User’s Guide B-21


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

0.62
F = ----------------
2.15
Φ

0.81
F = ----------
2
Φ

1
F = ---------
m
Φ

16. Impermeable Zones


Note separation will depend on the invasion depth, relative values of
Rmf and Rw
• When Rmf < Rw, then Rpd < or = Rat
• When Rmf > Rw, then Rpd > or = Rat
18. Calculating Tool Accuracy from the TDS
• A client wants to know what the accuracy of the 2 MHz phase
difference resistivity at 500 ohm-m?
• Go to Technical Data Sheet and look up accuracy specifications,
in this case: > 50 ohm-m, ± 0.5 mmho
• Convert formation resistivity (500 ohm-m) to mmhos
Conductivity (mmho) = 1,000/resistivity (ohm-m)
1,000/500 = 2.0 mmho
• Next calculate the conductivity range 2.0 ± 0.5 = 1.5 to 2.5 mmho
• Convert mmho back to units of resistivity (ohm-m)
• Resistivity (ohm-m) = 1,000/mmho
1,000/2.5 = 400 ohm-m
1,000/1.5 = 667 ohm-m
Resistivity range is 400 to 667 ohm-m
• Accuracy is ± 20% at low end of the range (400 ohm-m)
(500-400)/500 = 0.20, and ± 25% at the high end of the range
(667 ohm-m) (667-500)/667 = 0.25

B-22 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

•Notes•

User’s Guide B-23


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Quick Reference Guide

•Notes•

B-24 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
Appendix C
Navi-MPR Busmon Example

Appendix C is a Busmon example of


normal communications with a
SWWP-DAS, SWWP-GAM, and MPR.

Example
This is a Busmon example of normal communication with
a SWWP-DAS, SWWP-GAM, and MPR. The external and
internal nodes are displayed. (0501 command to F4 in
MEMTEST).
To From Len Cmd Data CHS
B BRDCST SWWP 000B (F1) D0 0000 00 02C3
B BRDCST SWWP 000B (F1) D0 0000 00 02C3
B BRDCST SWWP 000B (F1) D0 0000 00 02C3
B MEM RCDR 0011 FL_OPEN 33 0AFF FF 00 0000 0000
05 0407
(for descriptive purposes only 1 2 3 4)

The above message is displayed when internal nodes


display is selected with the 0501 command in MemTest.
The operation of the RCDR node is controlled by the
SWWP format table generated from the UFT and
downloaded to the SWWP by SUIT. SUIT indicates which
memory files to open. RCDR is requesting memory to open
the RPM file 330AFFFF. 33 is the product of FF - CC. 0A
is the request for RPM data. After the FFFF the first 00 (or
01) is no wrap or wrap, the next 00 of 2 bytes refers to the
maximum file size in kB (where 0000 is unlimited). The
third message of 2 sets of hex characters, the first of which
indicates the record size. The second last set is the data

User’s Guide C-1


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Busmon Example

offset followed by a message checksum.


B RCDR MEM 000A (02) 00 0000 01C0

The above is a reply from memory. (02) is a repeat of the


command to open a file. 00 is an acknowledgment code and
0000 is a memory node status.
B MEM RCDR 0011 FL_OPEN 33 FBFF FF 00 0002 0000
05 04FA

The above request opens an RPM error file with no wrap,


2 kilobyte file size followed by the record size then the data
offset.
B RCDR MEM 000A (02) 00 0000 01C0
B DIR RCDR 000F (F8) 0A 012C 012C 00 00 02
0301

The above command (F8) from the RCDR node tells the
DIR node (CC) the command used to acquire the data
(“0A” for RPM), followed by 2 sets of hex characters
denoting the initial delay in milliseconds (here it is 300 ms
or 30 seconds), the next set is the subsequent delay,
followed by the maximum number of records (00 being
unlimited), then the number of buckets. The second last set
of characters refers to the logging mode. 00 = always store
data, 01 = disable data storage if tool is rotating and 02 =
disable data storage if tool is not rotating. The last set is the
message checksum.
B RCDR DIR 000A (F8) FC 0000 0392

The above is the reply from the DIR node. (F8) is the repeat
of the command. FC is the acknowledgment and indicates
“undefined command code”.?Normal
B MEM RCDR 0011 FL_OPEN 33 07FF FF000000000006
0405
3307FFFF is the sensor data file being opened
B RCDR MEM 000A (02) 00 0000
01C0
B MEM RCDR 0011 FL_OPEN 33 FBFF FF000002000005
04FA
B RCDR MEM 000A (02) 00 0000 01C0
B DIR RCDR 000F (F8) 07 012C 012C1400010311

C-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Busmon Example

After the RCDR informs the DIR node of the command


“07” that will be used to acquire data, it sets the initial
delay and subsequent delay to 30 seconds, maximum
records, number of buckets, and the logging mode.
B RCDR DIR 000A (F8) FC 0000 0392
B MEM RCDR 0011 FL_OPEN 33 05FF FF000000000006
0403
3305FFFF refers to the temperature data file.
B RCDR MEM 000A (02) 00 0000 01C0
B MEM RCDR 0011 FL_OPEN 33 FBFF FF000002000005
04FA
B RCDR MEM 000A (02) 00 0000 01C0
B DIR RCDR 000F (F8) 05 012C 012C000000
02FA
B RCDR DIR 000A (F8) FC 0000 0392
B MEM RCDR 0011 FL_OPEN 1B 01FF FF000000000006
03E7

The above is the request from the RCDR node to Mem to


open file 1B01FFFF or the gamma data file.
B RCDR MEM 000A (02) 00 0000 01C0
B MEM RCDR 0011 FL_OPEN 1B FBFF FF000002000005
04E2
B RCDR MEM 000A (02) 00 0000 01C0
B GAM RCDR 000F (F8) 01 012C 007D000500
0363

01 indicates the command used to acquire the data. 012C


is the initial delay of 30 seconds followed by a subsequent
delay of 007D or 12.5 seconds. The file size is unlimited,
5 buckets of data will be requested.
The last set of hex characters refers to the logging mode.
The mode in this case is always store data.
B RCDR GAM 000A (F8) 00 0000 02AE
B GAM RCDR 000F (F8) 01 012C 007D000500
0363
B RCDR GAM 000A (F8) 00 0000 02AE
B GAM RCDR 000F (F8) 01 012C 007D 00 05 00
0363
B RCDR GAM 000A (F8) 00 0000 02AE
B MEM RCDR 0011 FL_OPEN 25 09FF FF00 0000 0000 06
03F9

User’s Guide C-3


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Busmon Example

The file opened above is for MPR data with no wrap no


limit on file size and record size followed by the data offset
(Command length +4, derived from the UFT).
B RCDR MEM 000A (02) 00 0000 01C0
B MEM RCDR 0011 FL_OPEN 25 FBFF FF000002000005
04EC
B RCDR MEM 000A (02) 00 0000 01C0
B MPR RCDR 000F (F8) 09 012C 0064 00 01 00
0344

After indicating the “09” command used to request data the


initial delay is 30 seconds followed by a subsequent delay
of 10 seconds (this being the acquisition time), unlimited
records, 1 bucket, with the last byte being “00” indicating
“always store to memory”.
B RCDR MPR 000A (F8) FC 0000 03A0
B DIR SWWP 0008 INC 01 01CA

SWWP regularly (every 5 seconds) requests inclination


data from the DIR. This is done to monitor inclination for
highside purposes.
B SWWP DIR 0013 (01) 00 8001
0100000000000000000256

The status bit 8001 is set when on power-up or after a reset


when a request for data has been made before the data is
obtained (i.e., the initial delay is not yet over). This bit is
cleared after the first acquisition. Note that as a result
SWWP now broadcasts a change of state to reflect the
change of inclination.
B BRDCST SWWP 000B (F1) C0 0000 0002B3
B BRDCST SWWP 000B (F1) C0 0000 0002B3
B BRDCST SWWP 000B (F1) C0 0000 0002B3
B DIR SWWP 0008 INC 01 01CA
B SWWP DIR 0013 (01) 00 0000
0142BD1B7741ADF920056D

After a successful request for inclination the SWWP


broadcasts a further change in status. The inclination is in
IEEE 32.
B BRDCST SWWP 000B (F1) D0 0000 00 02C3

C-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Busmon Example

B BRDCST SWWP 000B (F1) D0 0000 00 02C3


B BRDCST SWWP 000B (F1) D0 0000 00 02C3
B BRDCST SWWP 000B (F2) 00
B DEN SWWP 0011 (08) 03 2907 FE0000000144B8
0417
B DIR SWWP 0008 INC 01 01CA
B SWWP DIR 0013 (01) 0000
0142BD1D7141ADF9200569
B BRDCST SWWP 0008 (F2) 00
B DEN SWWP 0011 (08) 03 2907
FC00000001489C03FD
B BRDCST SWWP 0011 (F2) 00
B DIR SWWP 0008 INC 01 01CA
B SWWP DIR 0013 (01) 00 0000 0142BD1B7741ADF920
056D
B DEN SWWP 0011 (08) 03 2707 FE000000014C84
03E9
B (F3) MPT 0008 (01) 00 01C0
B MPT (F3) 002B (01) 00 0000
0000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000 01E3

F3 is the STAT slave node which provides access to the


SWWPs node status register. When the SWWP is in
master mode it allows the MPT node to obtain the node
status bits needed for the telemetry formats. The command
(01) returns 32 bytes (in either 1 or 0) which represents the
state of the 32 bits in the SWWPs node register. The status
after the acknowledgment refers to the SWWP. Refer to
the SWWP and SWWP-DAS communication spec. for
further details.
B (F3) MPT 0008 (02) 00 01C1
B MPT (F3) 000C (02) 00 0000 00 0001C5

The MPT nodes is requesting (02) the composite memory


status (MEM through to MEM07) needed for the telemetry
formats. (The following “00” or command extension byte
is ignored by SWWP). The STAT node’s reply after the
acknowledgment is the SWWP status, followed by the
command extension byte acknowledgment and then the 1
byte composite memory node status (either 1 or 0).
B DIR SWWP 0008 INC 01 01CA
B SWWP DIR 0013 (01) 00 0000

User’s Guide C-5


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Busmon Example

0142BD197C41ADF9200570
B BRDCST SWWP 0008 (F2) 00
B DEN SWWP 0011 (08) 03 2607 FA000000015070
03D4
B DIR MPT 0008 SU 01 019B

The MPT is requesting survey data from the DIR node. The
“01” after SU refers to the averaging of the data: 01 = short
averaging, 02 = medium averaging, 03 = long averaging.
B MPT DIR 001F (02) 00 0000 01 43A2155C
42BD197C 431C5F50
42A804FC 41ADF920 099B

After the acknowledgment byte the directional status is


displayed. This is followed by the averaging type byte then
in IEEE 32 the azimuth, inclination, gravity toolface,
magnetic toolface, temperature, and then checksum.
B DIR SWWP 0008 INC 01 01CA
B SWWP DIR 0013 (01) 00 0000
0142BD1B7741ADF920056D
B BRDCST SWWP0008 (F2) 00
B DIR RCDR 0008 SEN 00 01A3

The RCDR node is requesting sensor data from the DIR


node. “00” is no averaging.
B RCDR DIR 0027 (07) 00 0000 00 3ECC8C7A
BF69CA06 BDA28DB6
3E8D3BCD 3F31429A 3F317B6E 41ADF920 0EEB

The data after the normal acknowledgment byte is the DIR


status, then the averaging type. The following 6 sets of
IEEE 32 data are x, y, z accelerometer and magnetometer
values with a temperature in Celsius at the end.
B mem dir 0016 (07) 00 3B32 BDA7 B68A 3A34 3CC5 3CC5
46B7 06E1

The above sensor data is stored to memory in IEEE16.


B DIR RCDR 0008 TEMP 00 01A1
B RCDR DIR 000F (05) 00 0000 0041ADF92003AF
B mem dir 000A (05) 00 46B7 0152

The above request for temperature is given to the RCDR


node in IEEE32 and to memory in IEEE 16.
C-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ
Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Busmon Example

B DEN SWWP 0011 (08) 03 2407 FC000000015458


03C0
B GAM RCDR 0008 GAM 05 01BA
B RCDR GAM 000F (01) 00 0000 0541A5C29003F9
B mem gam 000A (01) 05 4697 011B

The same process for gamma data occurs as above.


B NPR B MPR RCDR 0008 (09) 01
01B4
B RCDR MPR 004C (09) 00 0000 01 592C B1B8 5A1E 5885
4F20 5E4A 4F9D AC5E 40CB 9C44 41FA 3741 43B9 3BBD 43EA
98B2 C64E A434 C85D 4AF8 CB13 48FE CD82 9928 BD64 AC66
BF23 30B4 C43B 2E8F C6E8 9C2E BC21C1

The RCDR is requesting (09) 01 buckets worth of raw data


which is given in IEEE 16. There are 32 raw values
followed by a two character data tag.
B mem mpr 0048 (09) 01 592C B1B8 5A1E 5885 4F20
5E4A 4F9D AC5E 40CB 9C44 41FA 3741 43B9 3BBD 43EA 98B2
C64E A434 C85D 4AF8 CB13 48FE CD82 9928 BD64 AC66 BF23
30B4 C43B 2E8F C6E8 9C2E 1F97

The MPR data is stored to memory without the


acknowledgment status or depth tag.
BRDCST SWWP 0011 (F2) 00
B DIR SWWP 0008 INC 01 01CA
B SWWP DIR 0013 (01) 00 0000 0142BD1B7741ADF920
056D
B BRDCST SWWP 0008 (F2) 00
B DEN SWWP 0011 (08) 03 2507 FB000000017F4C
03DF
B DIR SWWP 0008 INC 01 01CA
B SWWP DIR 0013 (01) 00 0000
0142BD197C41ADF9200570
B BRDCSTSWWP0008(F2) 00
B DIR RCDR 0008 SEN 00 01A3
B RCDRDIR0027 (07) 00 0000 00 3ECC8C7C BF69CA07
BDA26A35
3E8D2583 3F3142A8 3F317B6C 41ADF920 0DF6
B mem dir 0016 (07) 00 3B32
BDA7B6893A343CC53CC546B706E0
B DIR RCDR 0008 TEMP 00 01A1
B RCDR DIR 000F (05) 00 0000 0041ADF920 03AF
B mem dir 000A (05) 00 46B7 0152

User’s Guide C-7


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Busmon Example

B DEN SWWP 0011 (08) 03 2807 FB000000018336


03D0
B MPR RCDR 0008 (09) 01 01B4
B RCDR MPR 004C (09) 00 0000
1592CB1B45A1E58834F205E484F9DAC5E
40C99C4241F8374043B93BB943EA98A6C64DA422C8

5C4AF0CB1248FFCD819928BD64AC62BF2130B3C43B
2E8DC6E89C289C 2156
B mem mpr 0048 (09) 01 592C
B1B45A1E58834F205E484F9DAC5E40C99C
4241F8374043B93BB943EA98A6C64DA422C85C4AF0

CB1248FFCD819928BD64AC62BF2130B3C43B2E8DC6
E89C28 1F4C
B GAM RCDR 0008 GAM 05 01BA
B RCDR GAM 000F (01) 00 0000 054191EB840402
B (F3) MPT 0008 (01) 00 01C0
B MPT (F3) 002B (01) 00 0000
0000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000
01E3
B mem gam 000A (01) 05 4647 00CB
B BRDCST SWWP 0011 (F2) 00
B DIR SWWP 0008 INC 01 01CA
B SWWP DIR 0013 (01) 00 0000
0142BD1B7741ADF920056D
B DIR MPT 0008 TFA 02 019E
B MPT DIR 0017 (04) 00 0000
02431C5F5042A8057E41ADF910061F
B DEN SWWP 0011 (08) 03 2707 FC00000001871D03BB
B DIR SWWP 0008 INC 01 01CA
B SWWP DIR 0013 (01) 00 0000
0142BD1B7741ADF920056D
B BRDCST SWWP 0008 (F2) 00
B DEN SWWP 0011 (08) 03 2707 FB000000018B05
03A6
B MPR RCDR 0008 (09) 01 01B4
B RCDR MPR 004C (09) 00 0000
01592CB1B65A1E58844F205E464F9DAC5A
40C99C3841F8373C43B73BB943E998A6C64DA424C8

5C4AF0CB1248F6CD819916BD62AC60BF2030B2C43B
2E8DC6E89C286C 20F3
B mem mpr 0048 (09) 01 592C
B1B65A1E58844F205E464F9DAC5A40C99C
3841F8373C43B73BB943E998A6C64DA424C85C4AF0

C-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Busmon Example

CB1248F6CD819916BD62AC60BF2030B2C43B2E8DC6
E89C28 1F19
B BRDCST SWWP 0011 (F2) 00
B DIR SWWP 0008 INC 01 01CA
B SWWP DIR 0013 (01) 00 0000 0142BD1B7741ADF920
056D
B DEN SWWP 0011 (08) 03 2607 FC000000018EEF
0493
B GAM RCDR 0008 GAM 05 01BA
B RCDR GAM 000F (01) 00 0000 0541A0A3D8041D
B mem gam 000A (01) 05 4682 0106
B MPR MPT 0008 (0C) 04 01B6
B MPT MPR 006B (0C) 00 0000
04BFAA28003EFF05583F2FC8003F0C0783
BFD566003EB508393E8A84003EC85014BEA488003F
059F95BF32C5003EBE6DB9C03946003EE9C27A405A
EF803EF40489C01C88803E90A43D4070BB803E98A1
BC3E86A6003EEED5683F2866003E94953D29CC

The above request is for 4 buckets of calculated data


(phase difference and amplitude ratio). Altogether there
are 24 sets of data: 8 compensated and 16 AR/PD from
individual transmitters for both frequencies.
B BRDCSTSWWP 0011 (F2) 00

User’s Guide C-9


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Busmon Example

Tool Utility
Tool Utility is a program that allows basic communication
with the ADAM Bus Nodes. This program is for Windows
NT and will send individual commands and log their
responses in both a raw and translated form, monitor the
ADAM Bus, and output that information to screen and/or
file, and program the bootrom of binary nodes. For further
information, you should refer to the Tool Utility User’s
Manual, P/N 77759UG100, Rev. AA.

NT BusMon
The following screens illustrate what an operator will see
when using NT BusMon.

Figure C-1 NT BusMon

C-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Busmon Example

Figure C-2 NT BusMon

Figure C-3 NT BusMon

User’s Guide C-11


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Navi-MPR Busmon Example

•Notes•

C-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
Appendix D
Communications with MPRTEST

Appendix D covers how to communicate


with the MPR sub using the utility
MPRTEST. Refer to the MPRTEST
User’s Guide (P/N 7738UG100) for more
detail.

Software
The required software to communicate with the MPR is as
follows:
• Poll (Version 77468TE100) (not supported by
PowerComms)
• Tooltest (Version 77466TG100 or later)
• MPRTEST (Version 77384TH110 or later)
Most of this procedure can be done via Tooltest in the
DSeries offline package. MPRTEST is useful in verifying
the status of the nodes internal to MPR (i.e., the
transmitters and receivers) and for doing Frequency
Sweeps. For a quick operational check of the MPR sub
itself, MPRTEST is a useful facility which is why it is
described here. The real-time display used in MPRTEST is
mimicked in Tooltest.

User’s Guide D-1


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Communications with MPRTEST

Procedure
1. Run the PowerComms cables to the tool.
2. Connect the IO 1039 cable to the PowerComms Pod,
and then insert the other end of the pigtail connection
into the memory dump port (after calling the Pod).
See Figure D-1.

Figure D-1 PowerComms Cabling Setup

3. Run Poll or Test Verification in DSeries to confirm


communication with the MPR sub.
4. Select MPRTEST.
This utility is run to confirm the operation of the
MPR sub and can be used to perform part of the Air
Hang operation if necessary. If the Comm port has
been set up incorrectly, exit out of this utility and
type “MPRTEST [space] ct”. This will allow
MPRTEST to run without actually communicating
with the tool. Once the program starts, change the
Comm. port in the set up options, exit the program
and restart the program normally.

D-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Communications with MPRTEST

Two screens will be displayed initially. The


individual node status and part number will be
shown in the left screen as shown in Figure D-2.

Figure D-2 Polling Nodes/Main Menu Screens

The “Main Menu” screen allows you to monitor the


MPR sub’s operation in a graphical or numerical
form. The first five options allow you to select a
graphical visualization. For general purposes select
option a. Frequency sweep, Attenuation R1 and R2
with transmitter 1 through to 4. See Figure D-3.

User’s Guide D-3


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Communications with MPRTEST

Figure D-3 Polling Nodes/Single Transmitter Frequency


Sweep

The resulting display is shown in Figure D-4.

D-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Communications with MPRTEST

Figure D-4 Transmitter 3 Frequency Sweep

This operation can display a sinusoidal wave form


with its peaks about 400 kHz and 2 MHz for the
transmitter selected. This feature will be useful if
you suspect a frequency malfunction with the
transmitters, but it can also be used as a “quick look”
display while the tool is on the deck. As the program
takes a while to display, it is not recommended to do
this during the actual Air Hang if time is a concern.
Use an acquisition period of 250 ms, not 1,250 ms,
as this displays the data more quickly.
DO NOT set acquisition period to anything other
than 1,250 ms in any other menu unless told to by
the office. Do one transmitter at a time during the
Crane Hang. The Frequency Sweep option tells the
antennas to run through a selected range of
frequencies causing a resonance in the receivers at 2
MHz and 400 kHz. (Hence the peaks at 2 MHz and
400 kHz at the receivers).

User’s Guide D-5


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Communications with MPRTEST

Selecting [F10]: HELP before plotting shows the


keystrokes to print the screen, move the cursor from
peak-to-peak, etc. Display and print the screen to the
same scale as the tool paperwork.
5. Select the Real-time display to monitor the
numerical data from the tool. Although a variety of
options are available to you for Air Hang tests, select
“MPR Both Frequencies Four Transmitters”. If this
is done during a Crane Hang then the values will be
good, but if it is done on the deck the values will be
influenced by the proximity of the steel.
A second menu will display. Arrow down through
the run parameters and if desired create a new file
name to store the displayed data in. Ensure that
Acquisition time is 1,250 ms. See Figure D-5.

Figure D-5 Run Parameters Setup Screen

6. In the lower part of the menu, do not select a slower


time than 10 seconds in Update Rate. This is the time
the tool takes to acquire the data (4 transmitters x 2
frequencies x 1.25 sec = 10 seconds).

D-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Communications with MPRTEST

Check that the status, (should be 0000), and part


numbers (77392R0120 which refers to the MPR
68332 main processor) are OK. See Figure D-6.

Figure D-6 Raw Data Screen

The raw data screen is explained as follows: (from 2 MHz


data, Transmitter 1 (T1).
All four are raw values.
Phase R1 = Phase Receiver 1 90.1648
Phase R2 = Phase Receiver 2 84.8199
Attn. R1 = Attenuation Receiver 1 5.0742
Attn. R2 = Attenuation Receiver 2 10.7792

Pdiff T1 = Phase Difference for T1


(R1 - R2) = 5.3448
Attn T1 = Attenuation for T1
(R2 - R1) = 5.7050
Phase T1T2 = (diff T1+ diff T2)/2 = 0.4614
PDRes T1T2 = Bogus resistivity values
Phase difference T1T2 is the compensated value from the
two transmitters. The compensated T1T2 Attenuation or
Phase Difference are the long spaced Base Air Offset
values entered into the surface system computer. The rule

User’s Guide D-7


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Communications with MPRTEST

of thumb in accessing the quality of data during an Air


Hang is as follows:
• 4 compensated phases within 0.1 degrees of the Air
Hang
• 4 compensated attenuations within 0.1 dB of the Air
Hang
7. Note that Attn T1R2 (10.7792) is close to Attn T2R1
(11.5866) between transmitter 1 and 2 for 2 MHz.
The values for Attn T1R1 and Attn T2R2 are equally
close. If they are significantly different; i.e., more
than ± 3 dB apart there may be problems with one of
the transmitters even if the compensated data looks
good. Check with the office before running. Check
additionally, that the compensated phase difference
and attenuation values fall within the ranges below:
T1, T2 2 MHz = Phase Long -1.0 - 0.5 deg.
Attn Long 5.4 - 6.1 dB.
T3, T4 2 MHz = Phase Short -1.5 - 0.5 deg.
Attn Short 8.3 - 8.9 dB.

T1, T2 400 kHz = Phase Long -0.5 - 1.0 deg.


Attn Long 6.4 - 7.1 dB.
T3, T4 400 kHz = Phase Short -0.5 - 1.0 deg.
Attn Short 10.4 - 11.1 dB.
This is displayed on the example of the 4-3/4 inch MPR
Pre/Post Comparison Sheet on the next page.

D-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Communications with MPRTEST

User’s Guide D-9


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Communications with MPRTEST

8. After having successfully checked out the MPR sub,


leave the real-time display.
Enter the KTABLE Editor and check that the
acquisition time is 1.25 seconds. If it is another
number, call the office. See Figure D-7.

Figure D-7 KTable Editor

After having checked out the MPR sub, leave


MPRTEST.

D-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Communications with MPRTEST

•Notes•

User’s Guide D-11


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Communications with MPRTEST

•Notes•

D-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
Appendix E
Male Stab Connector Procedure

Appendix E is a procedure for replacing


the Male Stab Connector.

Procedure
Note: Due to the possible difficulties involved, it is
advisable not to remove the Male Stab
Connector Assembly in the field. If it
becomes absolutely necessary to remove the
Male Stab Connector Assembly from the top
of the MPR, proceed as follows:

CAUTION:
Make sure the top of the MPR is clean and dry.
Removing the Male Stab Connector will expose the
internal electronics of the MPR to the environment.

1. With the uphole box connection of the MPR Sub


exposed, carefully insert the Male Installation Tool
(P/N 707-500-140) over the Male Centralizer, letting
the arms of the centralizer pass into the slots on the
end of the tool. Line up the centralizer arms with the
dogs on the Draw Nut. See Figure E-1.

User’s Guide E-1


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Male Stab Connector Procedure

Male Installation Tool


Figure E-1 Special Male Installation Tool

Also, refer to Figure E-2.

PEEK Male
Insulator Pin
Bands

Male
Draw Centralizer
Nut

Engagement
Dog

4-40 Flathead
Screw (8 total)
Figure E-2 Draw Nut

E-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Male Stab Connector Procedure

CAUTION:
Do not spin the male centralizer more than one turn
or you will twist the internal wires. The tool will
drop down and engage the Draw Nut within a half a
turn. The tool must engage the dogs on the Draw
Nut for untorquing.

2. Break out the Draw Nut. The required torque should


be about 100 ft-lb. The Draw Nut should break out
from the Pressure Barrel rather than the Pressure
Barrel breaking out from the Paddle. Unscrew the
Draw Nut and remove the Male Stab Connector
Assembly from the MPR Sub. If the Pressure Barrel
slides out along with the Stab Connector, BE VERY
CAREFUL because the MPR electronics will be
completely exposed. As soon as possible, unscrew
the Draw Nut from the Pressure Barrel and carefully
slide the Pressure Barrel back over the MPR
electronics inside the sub. Screw the barrel back onto
the Paddle hand tight.
3. Inspect, Repair, and Replace the Male Stab
Connector Assembly. Replace the O-rings.The
smaller one is size 118 (P/N 728-500-015) and the
larger one is size 130 (P/N WWB130V45).
Remember it is important NOT to spin the Male
Centralizer relative to the Draw Nut, or wires will
get twisted. Inspect the LEMO triax connector inside
the Draw Nut. Check that the eight flathead 4-40
screws which secure the LEMO triax connector are
in place. Make sure the Inner Sleeve has 0.200 inch
of axial travel in the Draw Nut. Check the O-rings
(size 223, P/N 728-500-020) and Back-up rings
(P/N 53338-223) and grease with Dow Corning 111.

User’s Guide E-3


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Male Stab Connector Procedure

Note: Check the PEEK Insulator Bands on the


Male pin for any cracks or score marks. DO
NOT use if this is the case.

4. When the Male Stab Connector is satisfactory, lower


it into the top of the MPR Sub and screw it into the
Pressure Barrel. Again, use the Male Installation
Tool to engage the dogs of the draw nut, not the
centralizer arms, and torque the Draw Nut onto the
Pressure Barrel to 100 ft-lb. If in Step 2 the Pressure
Barrel came loose, this torquing operation will
tighten both joints.
5. One may check the axial travel of the mounted Male
Centralizer. In Step 3, the Inner Sleeve was checked
for 0.200 inch axial travel. When mounted in the
MPR Sub, that travel should be reduced to about
0.100 inch as the Male Centralizer contacts its
shoulder in the MPR collar. Therefore, carefully
reach in (without scratching the pin of the Male Stab
Connector) with an approximately 1/4 inch diameter
by 18 inch long rod with a hook formed at the end.
Slip the rod through the banana port of the Male
Centralizer and hook the end around the back side of
one of the centralizer arms. Pull outward (away from
the MPR Sub, uphole) until you feel a stop, then take
a depth measurement from the box connection face
to the front surface of one on the centralizer arms.
Use the straight end of the rod to push the Male
Centralizer back into the MPR sub until it touches
the shoulder. Take another depth measurement. The
difference in depth measurements should be about
0.100 inch.

E-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Male Stab Connector Procedure

Navi-MPR Male Stab

USMPR Male Stab

Figure E-3 Navi-MPR/USMPR Male Stabs Comparison

User’s Guide E-5


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Male Stab Connector Procedure

•Notes•

E-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
Appendix F
Relog Data Sheet

Appendix F covers the information


required when faxing or submitting logs
from the field to the office.

Note: A plain TIFF or binary file by itself is


useless without the relevant borehole
condition information.

If any interpretation of the log is to be made the following


information is required. The text in bold character is
required information. However, the more information that
can be supplied the better the analysis will be.
The Log Data Sheet starts on the next page.

User’s Guide F-1


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Relog Data Sheet

LOG DATA SHEET

FSE’s: Job No:


Company: Rig: Run #: Date
The following information must accompany all RWD logs
upon completion of a memory dump or when any
anomalous responses are noted during an MWD run.
Either include this data as a “header” file with the mini-
head, or better fax a full header (which would include
comments, bit runs, equipment page, environment page,
calibration page and remarks page). For analysis
resistivity logs should have all 4 phases presented on 1
track, all 4 attenuations on the other scaled appropriately.
All evaluation logs should be 1:240 MD and should
include TSD, Data Density, TVD and Inclination curve,
and bit depth, resistivity and density sliding indicator along
with any other pertinent information. VSS data should be
included.
Tool Type =_____Rm =_____@_____F/C (BHCT)
Tool size =_____Rmf =_____@_____F/C (BHCT)
Hole size =_____in/mm
Potassium =_____ppm, mg/ml %
Mud Type= _____
Barite =_____%.
Mud Weight=_____ppg/sg
Oil/water =_____
Chlorides=_____ppm/mg/L
Log intervals
From_____MD,_____TVD,_____MD,_____ TVD
of interest
From_____MD,_____TVD,_____MD,_____TVD
Data Crim corrected y/n_____
Data Processed averaged y/n_____
Tool Offsets: Assembly Type =
MWD to bit=_____ Gauge of Stab. above tool =_____
Res to bit=_____ Dist. from top of tool =_____
GR to bit=_____ Gauge of Stab. below tool =_____
F-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ
Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Relog Data Sheet

Den to bit=_____ Dist. from bottom of tool =_____


Neu to bit=_____ MDL Gauge =_____In/Out y/n
Bit type_____
Bicentered y/n_____
Min. Inc.= _____at_____MD_____TVD
Max. Inc.=_____at_____MD_____TVD
Flowrate=_____G/L PM
TVD @ start of run =_____MD_____
Washout y/n_____
estimated depth_____TVD,_____ MD
Trip gas y/n_____
Connection Gas y/n_____
Pore Pressure_____ppg,
Jarred y/n_____at_____MD_____TVD
Excessive shocks MD_____TVD, Sensor spiking
MD_____TVD, Sensor spiking
MD_____TVD, Sensor spiking
Relog sections
From_____MD,_____TVD, to_____MD,_____TVD
Backream y/n_____From (hours, day)_____/_____to
_____/_____
From_____MD,_____TVD, to_____MD,_____TVD
Backream y/n_____From (hours, day)_____/_____to
_____/_____
From_____MD,_____TVD, to_____MD,_____TVD
Backream y/n_____From (hours, day)_____/_____to
_____/_____
Overlap between runs (logged while washing to bottom)
From_____MD,_____TVD, to_____MD,_____TVD
From_____MD,_____TVD, to_____MD,_____TVD
From_____MD,_____TVD, to_____MD,_____TVD

User’s Guide F-3


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Relog Data Sheet

General Comments
Formation/Reservoir Description
Include a general description of the lithology
(un/consolidated, shale condition, porosity, presence of
hydrocarbons, presence of salt, geological structures
(faults, salt domes), formation dip, depleted zones,
comparison with offset logs, if available, etc.).

Log Description
Detail any unusual responses, shifts, spikes, invasion,
eccentricity, anisotropy, DHRM shifts, depth
discrepancies, quality of data, data gaps.

Drilling Conditions
Excessive torque and drag, stick slip, jarring, galling, mud
system, gas.

F-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Relog Data Sheet

•Notes•

User’s Guide F-5


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) Relog Data Sheet

•Notes•

F-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
Appendix G
DSeries Processing & BHA Data
Inputs

Appendix G details the basic data


processing steps. For more information,
refer to the DSeries User’s Guide
(P/N 77466UG100).

CAUTION:
As of the release of this book, DSeries is being
tested for Y2K compliance. In the future, this
appendix will be revised to reflect any changes to
this software. Use this appendix at your own
discretion.

Note: As DrillByte version 2.3.1 TD uses Gamma


Bias to adjust the gamma measurement for
different tool types, Gamma Bias must be
selected in DSeries when processing the
memory data. Currently, present only
apparent gamma (GRAX/GRAM) to the
customer because no tables are currently
available to correct gamma for borehole
and potassium effects for the modular MPR
tools. If for some reason corrected gamma

User’s Guide G-1


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) DSeries Processing & BHA Data

values are desired then a patch is required


in DrillByte to force DrillByte to use the
tables for the 4-3/4 inch MPR. The 4-3/4
inch MPR table is the table that DSeries
uses until the new correction factors are
devised for the larger MPR tools. This is not
the case for MSS.

1. Generate a spool file with ROPS, SPBS, etc. from


the real-time data.
2. Backup the memory data from the previous runs.
Once the tool has been dumped, process the current
run's memory data separately to assess the quality of
the data before appending it to the backed up file. A
comparison log between the memory and real-time
data must be made to confirm the correct time depth
profile and transmitter/receiver operation. For this
purpose all backplots and error data should be kept
and no averaging done to ensure the memory data is
verified as complete and accurate.
3. Always view the raw unaveraged data to ensure that
there are no transmitter problems. The compensation
routines can hide transmitter problems. Initially

G-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) DSeries Processing & BHA Data

process the data using the screen shown in


Figure G-1.

Figure G-1 Setup Screen

Note: If you have selected P-Series processing


there is no need to smooth the gamma ray
data when using M-Plot to display/print the
log.

4. Once you have verified that the raw data is good


(no transmitter/receiver failures) reprocess the data
using “appending with backplots” and “error data
discarded” options. Averaging the resistivity data at
this point will average the raw data prior to the
resistivities being calculated. This is the preferred
option compared to averaging the resistivities using
Squeeze.exe. CRIM corrections can be applied
provided according to local formation conditions.
(Call your local Technical Support if you are
unsure).

User’s Guide G-3


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) DSeries Processing & BHA Data

Failed Transmitter Identification

Raw Data Analysis


This example was taken from the Gulf of Mexico. The data
was logged on a reaming run made about 2 days after
drilling finished.
A quick look at the compensated data in Figure G-3 shows
problems with the long spaced 2 MHz data though the 400
kHz data appears good. The problem seems to be due to a
transmitter rather than a receiver but just by looking at the
compensated data it is impossible to determine which
transmitter is causing the problem.
The M-Plot screen in Figure G-2 shows the setup to display
the raw curves to identify the possible transmitter or
receiver failure. It is a good idea to view all 32 RAW
curves and also the Phase Difference and Amplitude Ratio
curves.

Figure G-2 M-Plot Screen

G-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) DSeries Processing & BHA Data

Figure G-3 Compensated 2 MHz and 400 kHz Long Spaced


Data Log
Note the response of the 2 MHz curves versus the 400 kHz
curve.

User’s Guide G-5


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) DSeries Processing & BHA Data

Figure G-4 Plot


This plot is drawn from the M-Plot setup. It is clear that the 2 MHz
transmitter 2 has failed.

G-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) DSeries Processing & BHA Data

Figure G-5 Log Reprocessed by DSeries


This data was reprocessed by DSeries using the option to
process with a failed transmitter. This option takes the receiver
error measured by the short spaced compensated data and
subtracts it from one good long spaced 2 MHz data from
transmitter 1 to derive the 2 MHz compensated long spaced
data.

User’s Guide G-7


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) DSeries Processing & BHA Data

It appears from the log that in the area from 7,100 to 7,180
feet MD that the 2 MHz data is still spiky. This is a tool
response reflecting eccentricity of the tool in the borehole.
The mud was a synthetic oil base, the formation contained
salt water and the drilling assembly was poorly centralized
in a moderately high inclination borehole (45 degrees).
BHA Hole opener 5.68 6-1/8 in. OD
Float sub 2.99 4-3/4 in. OD
Cross-over 3.01 4-3/4 in. OD
MPR 12.5 5-1/4 in OD
@ wear bands
Anchor sub 8.65 4-3/4 in. OD
MWD monel DC 31.10 4-3/4 in. OD
Flow sub 10.70 4-3/4 in. OD
3-1/2 HWDP 422.93 4-3/4 in. OD

Note: This example was obtained from a field test


using an earlier version of the current 4-3/4
inch MPR system on a MAD run. This
interpretation is subjective and is based on
the information at hand.

Note how the 400 kHz responds verses the 2 MHz. The
lower frequency is generally less susceptible to the
eccentricity effects than the 2 MHz. Additionally note the
curve separation between RAT and RPD. This is not the
normal profile one would expect to see when an oil based
mud invades a salt water sand where the RDP reading
would be higher than the RAT. Modeling shows that if the
hole was in gauge, the 2 MHz curves would be affected but
by nowhere near as much as this. In order for the curves to
be this affected by eccentricity under these conditions,
modeling shows that the hole must have been washed out
by at least 2-3 inches. This seems very likely given the
delay between drilling and logging this unconsolidated
sand. See Figure G-6.

G-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) DSeries Processing & BHA Data

Figure G-6 Data Reprocessed from a Failed Transmitter (T2)


Note the frequency dependency of eccentricity effects.

User’s Guide G-9


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) DSeries Processing & BHA Data

Failed Receiver Identification

Raw Data Analysis

Rig Failure Report


This example also came from the Gulf of Mexico. The
steerable assembly was run in diesel oil based mud at
inclinations less than 20 degrees. Real-time Phase
Difference and Amplitude Ratio data at 10,020 to 10,390
feet has become slightly erratic. Amplitude Ratio is more
noticeable than Phase Difference. On the surface all
transmitters and receivers appear good and pass post run
verification. Additionally, the Frequency sweep run in
MPRTEST looks good. Tool and probe were not rerun
after the memory was dumped.

Analysis
The problem was relatively easily identified by looking at
the raw data using a screen set up in a similar fashion to the
one below in Figure G-7. It is a good idea to view all 32
RAW curves and also the Phase Difference and Amplitude
Ratio curves. This helped identify the intermittent
spikiness in the compensated data as being due to an
intermittent problem with Receiver 1. Note that both the 2
MHz and the 400 kHz data is intermittently affected. In this
situation check with your local Technical Support and oil
company personnel as to whether the section needs
relogging, or reprocessing for a failed receiver.

G-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) DSeries Processing & BHA Data

Figure G-7 M-Plot Screen Setup

User’s Guide G-11


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) DSeries Processing & BHA Data

Figure G-8 Memory Log


Note: Presentation is not standard. Redone for clarification.

G-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) DSeries Processing & BHA Data

Figure G-9 Raw Data


Note that the intermittent spikiness associated with Receiver 1.
The data below 10,200 feet remained good.

User’s Guide G-13


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) DSeries Processing & BHA Data

•Notes•

G-14 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
Appendix H
UP & UP/UPU Rigsite Procedures

Appendix H covers rigsite procedures for


the UP & UP/UPU.

Maintenance Procedures when Tripping


In/Out of the Hole
1. Each time the MWD tool is pulled out of hole, the
Main Valve Assembly (MVA) should be flushed and
lubricated. To flush the MVA, install the MVA
Flushing Tool (P/N 60391) over the Inlet Screen and
down onto the Valve Body. While flushing with
water, work the Valve Body up and down several
times. After flushing, lubricate the Main Valve
Assembly by pouring Fluid Film (P/N 67756-002)
into the top of the flushing tool and then working the
Valve Body up and down.

Note: If the use of water is not permitted on the rig


floor, then only lubricate the Valve Body.

2. If the MVA has accumulated more than 150 hours


(4-3/4" & 6-3/4") or 100 hours (8" & 9-1/2"), replace
the entire MVA with a new or refurbished one. The
used MVA can be inspected and serviced at a later
time on the rig or it can be sent back to the workshop
for R&M.
3. Prior to the MWD tool going back in the hole, verify
that the MVA Valve Body is free to move. If the

User’s Guide H-1


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) UP & UP/UPU Rigsite Procedures

Valve Body is jammed and cannot be worked free,


then replace the entire MVA.

UP & UP/UPU System Retrieval


This procedure outlines the retrieval of the UP and
UP/UPU.
1. On the rig floor, secure the drillstring by clamping on
the MWD Collar or the Lower UP or UP/UPU Sub.
2. Remove all drillstring components above the MVA
Sub and untorque the MVA Sub.
3. Flush and lubricate the MVA as per standard
maintenance when tripping.
4. If a lifting cap is available, install the box connection
of the MVA sub.

Table H-1 Box Connections

Tool Size MVA Box Connection

4-3/4" 3-1/2" I.F. (NC-38)


6-3/4" 4-1/2" I.F. (NC-50)
8" 6-5/8" Reg
9-1/2" 7-5/8" Reg

5. Remove the MVA sub from the Lower Sub and set
aside.
6. Using the CVA Lifting Assembly Attachment, latch
onto the front of the CVA and pull the probe

H-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) UP & UP/UPU Rigsite Procedures

assembly up high enough to get the NaviTrak


Slip-a-Vator clamp below the lower centralizer.

Figure H-1 CVA Lifting Assembly Attachment

7. Secure the Slip-a-Vator clamp in place.


8. Lower the probe until the Slip-a-Vator clamp rests
on the lower sub and then unlatch the CVA Lifter
Assembly attachment.
9. Install the CVA O-ring protective cap (P/N 60488)
over the large CVA O-ring.

User’s Guide H-3


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) UP & UP/UPU Rigsite Procedures

For the UP System Only:

Figure H-2 UP System

10. Remove the Crush Ring (1) and Sleeve Liner (2)
from the assembly.

Note: The 6-3/4" does not have a Crush Ring.

11. Discard the Crush Ring and set the Sleeve Liner
aside.

H-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) UP & UP/UPU Rigsite Procedures

For the UP/UPU System Only

Figure H-3 UP/UPU System

12. Remove the Adjustment Sleeve (1) from the


assembly and set aside.

Note: The 4-3/4" does not have an Adjustment


Sleeve.

13. Pull out the probe from its collar and lay it down.
14. At this time, if a problem with the MVA is expected
or a restrictor size change is necessary, then proceed
with MVA maintenance at this time.
Also at this time, inspect the large CVA O-ring for
damage. If a replacement is required, perform MVA
maintenance.

User’s Guide H-5


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) UP & UP/UPU Rigsite Procedures

Main Valve Assembly (MVA)

Figure H-4 Main Valve Assembly (MVA)

MVA Disassembly
1. Remove Thread Protector Assembly (1) from MVA
Sub (2) if installed.
2. Remove Retaining Ring (3) from MVA Sub (2)
using the small pliers for the 4-3/4" and the large
pliers for 6-3/4" – 9-1/2".

Note: When using the large snap ring pliers, it is


best to have the screws that hold on the tips
facing inward. This will provide you with
more clearance to access the holes in the
retaining ring.

Note: Sometimes the Restrictor Carrier provides


too much force against the back of the
retaining ring, making it difficult to remove.
If this is the case, then have one operator
push or tap down on the Carrier with a

H-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) UP & UP/UPU Rigsite Procedures

screwdriver while the other operator tries to


free the ring by working it side-to-side.

3. Insert MVA Restrictor Protector Tool (P/N 60384)


over Inlet Screen (6), and secure with O-ring
(P/N 28309), as shown in the drawing below.

Figure H-5 MVA Disassembly

4. Turn the Sub on the box end with the Inlet Screen (6)
down.
5. Insert the appropriate size MVA Removal RAM
Tool (P/N 60378, 60379, 60380, or 60390) in the pin
end of the MVA Sub (2).
6. Tap on the end of the RAM with a 2" diameter bar.
This will remove the Restrictor Assembly (4) and the
Centralizer (5) with the Valve Body Guide at the
same time.

User’s Guide H-7


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) UP & UP/UPU Rigsite Procedures

Restrictor Carrier Maintenance

Figure H-6 Restrictor Carrier Drawing 1

Figure H-7 Restrictor Carrier Drawing 2

7. Remove Retaining Ring (2) from MVA Restrictor


Support (1).

H-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) UP & UP/UPU Rigsite Procedures

8. Turn the Restrictor Support over so that the


Retaining Ring end is face down on the workbench.

Note: Place a piece of wood or a shop towel


underneath to absorb the impact, and
prevent damage to the Restrictor.

9. Remove the Carbide Restrictor (4) from Restrictor


Support (1) using a mallet and the Restrictor
Removal Tool (P/N 60392 for 4-3/4" and 60393 for
6-3/4", 8", 9-1/2").
10. Remove and discard all O-rings (3, 5 and 8). For the
6-3/4" tool, inspect Back-up Ring (7 and 6). Discard
if damaged.
11. Inspect Carbide Restrictor (4):
• If cracking, abnormal washing, and/or
excessive pitting is found, discard the part
• If the ID of the restrictor is more than 0.50 mm
over the nominal restrictor size, discard the
part.
12. Lubricate O-ring (3) with Dow 111 (P/N 98000005)
or Parker Super O-Lube (714-000-010) and install
into ID of the Restrictor Support (1).
13. At this time, if required, the restrictor can be
replaced with a smaller “low flow” restrictor. The
following chart provides the usable range for each
restrictor option.

User’s Guide H-9


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) UP & UP/UPU Rigsite Procedures

Table H-2 Restrictor Options

Tool Flow Range Flow Range


Restrictor ID
Size (gpm) (lpm)

4-3/4" 48 mm (Standard) 160 - 320 gpm 606 - 1,211 lpm


47 mm (Low Flow) 160 - 225 gpm 606 - 852 lpm

6-3/4" 52 mm (Standard) 400 - 675 gpm 1,524 - 2,555 lpm


50 mm (Low Flow) 300 - 450 gpm 1,136 - 1,703 lpm
8" 54 mm (Standard) 525 - 900 gpm 1,987 - 3,407 lpm
53 mm (Low Flow) 400 - 600 gpm 1,514 - 2,271 lpm

9-1/2" 57 mm (Standard) 800 - 1,350 gpm 3,028 - 5,100 lpm


55 mm (Low Flow) 600 - 900 gpm 2,271 - 3,407 lpm

14. Install Restrictor (4) into Restrictor Carrier (1).


15. Install Retaining Ring (2) into Restrictor Carrier.

Note: If Retaining Ring has a flat side and rounded


side, make sure that the flat side is facing
away from the Retainer.

16. Install new O-rings (5 and 8) onto the OD of the


Restrictor Carrier. For 6-3/4" tools, install Backup
Rings (6 and 7) if the old ones were discarded.

Note: For the 6-3/4" tool, ensure that the Backup


Rings are on the correct side of the O-ring.

H-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) UP & UP/UPU Rigsite Procedures

MVA Reassembly
Before reassembling the MVA, generously spray Fluid
Film lubricant (P/N 67756-002) into the MVA Guide
through the bottom hole of the Guide Body. Move the
Main Bell up and down to work in the lubricant.

Note: Do not use WD-40. WD-40 attacks Viton


O-rings and will evaporate especially if the
tool is racked for a period of time.

1. Rest the MVA Sub (2) on the pin end.


2. Coat the Centralizer of the Main Valve Body
Assembly with grease and install into MVA Sub (2).

Figure H-8 MVA Assembly

3. Coat the O-rings on the Restrictor Carrier (4) with


Dow 111 (P/N 98000005) or Parker Super O-Lube
(P/N 714-000-010) and then install into the MVA
Sub (2). It will be necessary to use the Restrictor
Carrier Installation Tool (P/N 60351) and a rubber
mallet to seat the Restrictor Assembly.
4. Using Snap Ring Pliers (P/N 96053-003 or 86472)
install Snap Ring (3) into MVA Sub (2). It may be

User’s Guide H-11


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) UP & UP/UPU Rigsite Procedures

necessary to use the Restrictor Carrier Installation


Tool (P/N 60351) and a rubber mallet to push the
Carrier down to seat the ring into its groove.

CAUTION:
When installing a 4-3/4" beveled snap ring
(P/N 76693-350), ensure that it is installed with the
beveled side facing up. Failure to do so will result
in a failure to pulse.

H-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) UP & UP/UPU Rigsite Procedures

CVA Maintenance

Figure H-9 CVA

Before reassembling the probe into the drill collar, inspect


the large CVA O-ring (2) for damage.
If damaged, remove Seat Support Cap (1) with Seat Cap
Socket Tool (P/N 60436) and a 3/8" drive torque wrench.

Note: Ensure that the Pilot Valve Seat (3) does not
come untorqued. If it does, apply Loctite
272 (P/N 723-500-014) and retorque to 52
ft-lb (70 Nm).

1. Clean the threads of the Seat Cap with a wire brush.


2. Coat the ID of a new O-ring with O-ring lubricant
and install onto the Seat Support Cap.
3. Apply Loctite 272 (P/N 723-500-014) sparingly to
the threads of the Seat Support Cap and install into
the CVA. Torque to 50 Nm (37 ft-lb) using the Seat
Cap Socket Tool and a torque wrench.

User’s Guide H-13


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) UP & UP/UPU Rigsite Procedures

4. Install the CVA O-ring Protective Cap (P/N 60488)


onto the large CVA O-ring to protect it from damage
while raising the probe string up to the drill floor.

H-14 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) UP & UP/UPU Rigsite Procedures

•Notes•

User’s Guide H-15


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) UP & UP/UPU Rigsite Procedures

•Notes•

H-16 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
Appendix I
MPR/RNT Test Software

Appendix I is a repeat of the MPR/RNT


Test Software User’s Guide,
P/N 77530FU118, Rev. AA.

Note: This procedure is subject to change in the


future. Always check that you are using the
latest revision. As of this publication, Rev.
AA is the latest.

User’s Guide I-1


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

Subject: No. 77530FU118


MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide Rev. AA
Page 1 of 70

Rev. ECN Amendment Approval Date

AA 990129-02 Initial Release B. Oliver 6-15-99

1 Software Overview
1.1 Purpose

1.1.1 The purpose of this document is to describe the MPR/RNT Test software.
The document is designed primarily for a Field Base User audience,
however, it may prove to be beneficial knowledge for other users.

1.1.2 When reading this document the user will note several types of brackets are
used. These have the following meaning:

<Key Name>

• The “key name” is a key found on a PC keyboard.

[Button Name]

• The “Button Name” is found on a display screen in the


software. Typically the user can select these buttons by highlighting
the field and pressing the <Enter> key.

{Field Name}

• The “Field Name” is the name of a field found in a screen in


the software. Typically the user can enter text or decimal numbers
into these fields.

Be sure this is the latest revision of this document!

I-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 2 of 70

1.2 Functionality

1.2.1 The MTSI Rack (P/N 49100-101) is based around the standard
configuration of a Personal Computer, a Watlow Oven Controller, and a
MTSI box. These devices are controlled by the MPR/RNT Test Software.
The user interacts with the system through the software and its user
interface. The user interface is described in section 1.3. Ancillary
equipment includes a Vertical Oven, ID Heaters and Horizontal Oven.

1.2.2 The system provides access to a set of tests which can be used to
functionally check the MPR and RNT sub systems. The functions are listed
below:
• Air Test - Allows the user to test the sub in air to confirm its air
offsets.
• Temperature Test - The user can test the sub over the operational
temperature range and produce a temperature characterization.
• Tank Test - Allows the user to confirm tool operation at low
Resistivity.
• Plateau Test - Allows the user to verify NBIG Gamma tool output in
an RNT sub.
• Debug Test - Allows the user to view a snapshot of all tool outputs on
one screen running in real-time.
• Frequency Sweep - Used to check the tool response to a varying
frequency of both the 2 Meg and 400 K signals. By changing the
frequency and monitoring the output, transmitter, and receiver
performance can be evaluated.
• NCO Read/Write - Allows the user to Read or Write to the NCO
table.
• K-Table Read/Write - Allows the user to Read or Write to the
K-Table.
• Air Hang Editor - Allows the user to review and store Air Hang data
to the tool EEPROM for future retrieval at the rigsite and the service
base.

1.3 User Interface

1.3.1 The User Interface (UI) is built around an IDLE loop which checks for user
key input. The user sees screens that are generated by the UI. The keys
which are available for interaction with the user interface are listed and
described below.

User’s Guide I-3


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 3 of 70

1.3.2 Help System

A. Each help screen contains keywords that appear in boldface. These


words are cross referenced to other help screens that discuss the
topics of the boldface words. Press <Enter> while over a particular
word or words to pass control to the new screen.

B. <F1> will always provide help when it is available. The help system
is context-sensitive. This means that calling help from different parts
of the system will produce help which is about the field the cursor is
on when <F1> is pressed.

C. You can move to and select any keyword with the keyboard. This is
done by moving the cursor using the <Arrow> keys.

D. If you have called one help screen from another, return to the calling
screen by pressing Backspace. To leave help, press the <Esc> key.

1.3.3 Keyboard Operation

A. The <Arrow> keys are used to move the cursor between all fields and
buttons.

B. The <Enter> key will move the cursor to the next field when the field
is of the Data Entry type. When the cursor is over a button and the
<Enter> key is pressed, the operation attached to that button will be
performed. e.g., [Start] in the Air Test screen will start the Air Test.

C. <Esc> will allow the user to exit most screens leaving the data in that
screen unchanged. There are two exceptions:
• The Main Menu, the only way to leave this screen is through
Quit.
• All the test data screens have the <Esc> key locked out when a
test is executing. This is to prevent accidental termination of a
test.

D. All data entry fields are controlled and will only accept appropriate
data entry; e.g., in a field which requires a time to be entered, 60
minutes will be rejected as out of range. To exit the field, a valid
value must be entered.

E. <Insert> key toggle. In a text entry field the insert key will change the
shape of the cursor and allow overwrite or insert for character entry.

F. <Home> key will return the cursor to the first field in a screen.

I-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 4 of 70

G. <Pg Up>/<Pg Dn> keys are available to scroll through data in the test
screens.

H. <Shift><Arrow> combination allows the user to move the screens to


different locations on the monitor. (The Arrow keys must be those on
the number pad of the keyboard)

I. Gray <+> key is used to pull down lists of items. This is particularly
important in the File List Box screen.

1.3.4 Buttons

A. [Ok] buttons are present in data entry screens to allow the user to
confirm the data entered. Unless the user places the cursor over this
button and presses <Enter>, the data entered into the screen by the
user will not be updated.

B. [Cancel] buttons are present to allow the user to leave the screen
without updating the data entered. This can be useful if the user
makes a mistake and cannot remember the state of the original data.

C. Buttons and fields can appear “grayed out” in a screen. This means
the field or button is not active. Often fields can only be activated by
entering required data into another field or by activating a feature.

1.4 Hardware Requirements

1.4.1 The MTSI Rack (P/N 49100-101) consists of the following hardware
components:
• 19 inch Rack
• Personal Computer
• IBM PC 386 or equivalent. Clock speed > 20 MHz
• 3 Open Slots
• 1 MB of RAM, minimum
• 40 MB Hard Drive (or greater)
• 1.2 MB Floppy Drive
• 1.44 MB Floppy Drive
• 5 Serial Ports (4 provided by Fastcom card)
• 1 Parallel Port (or more)

User’s Guide I-5


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 5 of 70

• EGA Color Monitor (or better)


• 1 FASTCOM Serial Interface Card
• 1 PIO12 Interface Card
• MTSI Box (P/N 59855-TAB (rack mount) or P/N 59355-TAB
(standalone)
• MTI Modular Tool Interface (P/N 59280-101)
• Modem Module (P/N 59282-101)
• DPR Detector (P/N 59986-101)
• Watlow Oven Controller
• Printer (Optional)

1.4.2 Additional Equipment


• Vertical Oven
• ID Heaters
• Horizontal Oven

I-6 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 6 of 70

Figure 1 MTSI Rack, MPR-RNT Tool, Components, and Cables

1.5 Software Requirements

1.5.1 The Personal Computer specified in section 1.4 must be installed with the
software in order for the system to operate. (See section 4).

1.5.2 The system requires that DOS 6.x or greater be installed on the hard disk.
The MPR/RNT test software must be installed in the \MPRRNT directory.
The FASTCOM card requires software drivers to be installed. When these
components have been installed according to the procedure, the user may
start the MPR/RNT test code by changing to the \MPRRNT directory and
entering MPRRNT<Enter> on the command line (c: prompt). If these
drivers are not installed MPR/RNT will detect this and generate a Warning
message to the user. Without these drivers some functions are disabled
since they are needed to talk to other equipment via a serial port
connection.

User’s Guide I-7


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 7 of 70

1.6 Verification

1.6.1 The software and hardware rack system must be verified before running
this software.

1.7 Glossary of Terms

1.7.1 State Machine - A software construct which is used to provide the program
with an order in which to execute functions performed by the program. The
program moves from one state to the next as it progresses through
functions.

1.7.2 WYSIWYG - What You See Is What You Get, refers to the relationship
between a screens display and a printout of that display.

2 Test Procedures
2.1 This section provides information on procedures for testing the MPR/RNT sub
systems by using this software package. The user can refer to the document
P/N 77357FU110 for detail about the MTSI box system.

2.2 Test Flow

In order to start a test, the following steps must be performed.

2.2.1 From the Main Menu, (see section 2.3) select [System Setup].

2.2.2 Complete the System Setup Screen, (see section 2.4) and leave by selecting
[Ok].

2.2.3 Select [Start Test] from the Main Menu the Screen, the Test Specifications
screen, (see section 2.6), will be displayed. Complete this screen, selecting
the test type and the limits to terminate the test. Leave the screen by
selecting the [Ok] button.

2.2.4 The Utility Screen (see section 2.7) presents several options. If you wish to
view the data collected in the Data View Screen, (see section 2.8), you
must first select the [Print Setup] button.

2.2.5 Complete the Print Setup Screen as shown in section 2.7.7. In order to
preserve the setup, the user must save it to a configuration file.

I-8 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 8 of 70

2.2.6 Returning to the Utilities Menu select [Start Test]. Both the Graph View
and Data View buttons are now available. The Status Message on the
Status bar indicates the state of data collection. The user may select to view
the data as a data base list [Data View], or as a graph [Graph View].

2.2.7 When the test is completed, the user can print the results by selecting the
[Print] button from the Utility Screen. The contents of the print out are
controlled by the Print Setup screen.

2.3 Main Menu

2.3.1 The Main menu in Figure 2 is initially presented with only the
[Information], [System Setup], [Run Debug Screen], [K Table Editor],
[Review Data], [Auto Tool Detect], and [Quit] buttons. All other options
are grayed out. In order to activate the grayed out options. the user must
select the [System Setup] button and complete that screen. See section 2.4
System Setup.

Figure 2 Main Menu

2.3.2 At the top of the screen is the software name, part number, revision, and
version information along with the Acomm library software name, part
number, revision, and version number. There are two lines of information
at the bottom of the screen. The dark gray line displays system errors and
extended help. The lighter gray line displays the current tool type selected
(MPR, RNT, or USR), then the type of Heaters selected (ID Heaters,
Vertical Oven, Horizontal Oven), then a general status field used to display

User’s Guide I-9


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 9 of 70

the current software task or general information, the amount of


conventional memory free for the program to run in (Max 640 K), the
current PC time, and finally an active character that appears to spin when
performing actions that require the user to wait until complete. The DOS
memory value should not fall below 35 K. If less than 35 K is reported,
then screens may fail to load.

2.3.3 The information screen reports the program name, part number, revision,
version, and release data. Pressing <F1> while in this screen will bring up
an overall help screen with highlighted names and travel buttons to various
types of information. See Figure 3.

Figure 3 Main Menu: Information Screen

I-10 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 10 of 70

2.4 System Setup

2.4.1 The System Setup screen is used to enter basic information about the user,
location of data files, and the type of tool under test. See Figure 4.

Figure 4 Setup Menu

2.4.2 Moving through the screen the user can enter the information specified.
When filling in the path fields ({Primary}, {Secondary}, and {QED}
fields) the program verifies the paths entered. If the path is not found the
user will be prompted to allow the program to create the specified path.
However, there is an exception when a path is specified on a drive which
does not exist, then a “Drive not Ready” error or “Insert Disk in Drive A”
message will be displayed as shown in Figure 5 embed. When this message
is displayed the user can ignore the request and enter the correct drive and
path name. These paths are used to store data to disk.

User’s Guide I-11


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 11 of 70

Figure 5 System Setup

2.4.3 Selecting Tool Type and Serial Number

A. As can be seen in Figure 4 the user is required to select both a


{Sub Type} and {Sub S/N}. The Sub Type can be either MPR, RNT,
or USR. It is important to select the correct type as the program uses
different commands to obtain data from the tools. The {Sub S/N} is
used to uniquely identify a Data Base file. See section 2.4.5, File
System. If the user enters an incomplete serial number (less than 4
numbers) or the “*” key then the program will offer the user a list of
serial number files to select from.

2.4.4 Selecting Facility Name

A. As can be seen in Figure 6, the user can select from a list of facilities.
This is done by pressing the <Space Bar>, when over the {Facility}
field, and then using the <Arrow Keys> to highlight the name
required.

I-12 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 12 of 70

Figure 6 Setup Screen: Floppy Disk Missing

B. Not all worldwide locations are listed, therefore, a Not_Listed file has
been added for these areas.

2.4.5 File System

A. The program has several files and directories dedicated to its


operation. These are detailed below.

B. File Naming Conventions

The default file system created by this program appears on the hard
drive as follows:

Table 1: File Naming Conventions

Path Description
\MPRRNT.DAT\<SUB P/N>\SSS- Data Base Files
SAXXX>.dat
\MPRRNT.DAT\<SUB P/N>\SSSS.sn Sub S/N Files
\MPRRNT.DAT\<SUB Latest Air Hang for a SN
P/N>\SSSS.AHG

User’s Guide I-13


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 13 of 70

Table 1: File Naming Conventions

Path Description
\MPRRNT.DAT\<SUB Latest Tank Avgs. for a SN
P/N>\SSSS.TNK
\MPRRNT.DAT\<SUB Latest Temp. Avgs. for a S/N
P/N>\SSSS.TEM
\MPRRNT\MPRRNT.cfg System Startup Config. File
\MPRRNT\<NAME>.pfg Print Screen Config. File
\MPRRNT\<NAME>.gfg Graphic Screen Config. File
\MPRRNT\<TTTYYZ>.pro Watlow Temperature Profile Files
\MPRRNT\MPRRNT.1nf Screen File
\MPRRNT\MPRRNT.hlp System Help File
\MPRRNT\MPRRNT.tbl Screen File for Functions
\MPRRNT\77530Q1.101 Resistivity Lookup Tables for Tank
\MPRRNT\77530Q2.101 Testing

where SSSS 4 digit S/N taken from the Setup Screen


A Can be A, B, or C to indicate an Air, Temp. or
Tank Test
XXX 0-999 Sequence Number
<NAME> User input file name (8.3 DOS format)
TTT Can be MPR or RNT to indicate which type of
tool profile to use
YY Can be ID, VT, or HZ for ID heaters, Vertical
Oven, Horizontal Oven
Z Indicates the tool size 3, 4, 6, 8 or 9 inch

I-14 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 14 of 70

C. Data Base File Header and Records


• The program first reads in the mprrnt.cfg file, to find the name of the
last file used by the program. It then loads in the header of that file, if
there is one, and initializes the system data structures. The header in
the data base files is updated any time a change is made to either the
System Setup Screen, or the Test Specification screen.
• The data base file records are placed after the header in the file. All
the data is in binary form and can only be translated by the program,
into ASCII data, through the Print Setup Screen and the [Print] button
in the Utility Screen.
• After the file header the program places the data base records. These
records contain data collected from the UUT, see section 2.8.2,
Contents of Data Base. As can be seen from the list in section 2.8.2,
there are over seventy data base variables. It is for this reason that the
program allows only twenty items to be printed or displayed at a
time. In order to get the complete data base printed the user would be
required to create five print configuration files and print the data
selected in each file. This is not considered to be a problem as all the
data base variables required to verify functionality can be fitted in
one display. When troubleshooting the system then more detail can
be obtained if required.

D. File Versions
• In each of the system files the first 12 bytes are dedicated to a part
number and version number. The program checks these file names
against the part number and version number found in the program. If
there are any differences the user is prompted to use a conversion
program to update the file in question to the latest version.

2.4.6 Oven Type Selection

A. As can be seen in Figure 5, the user can select one of three heater
types: Vertical Oven, ID Heaters, or Horizontal Oven. Selecting the
correct type is very important as the Watlow controller is
programmed with a specific heater profile based on the selection.

2.4.7 Test Station

A. The user may designate specific areas in the field base as a test
station. These can be numbered and given a description. This
program only stores this information and does not make any effort to
apply corrections based on local magnetic anomalies. This is not a
requirement for this product. The user should, however, be aware that

User’s Guide I-15


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 15 of 70

large gradients in the local magnetic field will still cause the tool to
perform poorly. See Station setup procedure 52389 Acceptance Test
Procedures for DPRIIA assemblies.

2.4.8 Oven Type

A. There are three type of heating systems available for use. Primarily
the MPR/RNT use the vertical and horizontal oven. ID heaters are
added for completeness, although no ID heater profiles have been
tested to this date.

2.4.9 Password

A. There are 4 levels of passwords for the user to use. The passwords are
primarily used where critical data types can be changed and if the
incorrect data is entered in one of these fields, tool function may be
impaired or destroyed.

CAUTION: Only properly authorized personnel should change upper


level parameters.
0 Field Users Level - Allows changes in non-critical
1 Shop Technician Level - Allows changes to certain operating
system parameters and k-table functions
2 Engineering Users Level - Allows changes to clock freq., TX
freq., etc. for development use
3 Highest Level - Allows changes to all parameters in every
field

B. For the password names, consult the MPR/RNT Online Help


Manual by pressing <F1> and examining the password help field.

2.4.10 Serial Numbers

A. Serial Numbers for each tool build can be entered by traveling down
to the serial numbers button and pressing <RTN>. This will pull up
an entry menu as shown in Figure 7.

B. This data is stored in the SSSS.sn file for later retrieval.


(See Table 1).

I-16 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 16 of 70

Figure 7 Sub Serial Number Entry Screen

2.5 Auto Tool Detection

2.5.1 After the user completes the system setup, the program will attempt to
determine all nodes that are present. This is done each time the tool is
started, or if the [Auto Tool Detect] is selected from the [Main Menu].

2.5.2 The software will continue pooling the nodes until the user presses the
<Ctrl> key to exit this screen. This is quite useful in determining if all
nodes are present and functioning.

2.5.3 Upon detection, each field is filled with the Node address, the Node
Acronym, Node Firmware number, Node description, status code and
acknowledge code. Refer to the Node Specific Communications
Specification for all Status and acknowledge codes.

2.5.4 If a MTSI is present, it will be polled for all the correct switch positions. In
the event the switches are not correctly positioned, an error screen will pop
up and tell the user which switch is incorrect. The user must then adjust the
switches and press the <Esc> key.

2.5.5 If there is no MTSI, and a MTTI box or some such “dumb” power supply is
used, the menu will state that it cannot find the MTSI and warns the user
that no shutdown safety will be available.

User’s Guide I-17


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 17 of 70

2.5.6 This screen also tests communications for the Watlow temperature
controller, total tool current (if MTSI is present) and determines if the
communications driver are present (see section 4.4). See Figure 8.

Figure 8 Auto Tool Detection Screen

2.6 Test Specification

2.6.1 The Test Specification Screen, shown in Figure 9, is used to select the test
that will run, and the test termination parameters. Moving through the
screen fields; the {Sub Size} field should be checked each time. This field
is used to determine which temperature profile is to be used to program the
Watlow controller. Along with the {Oven Type} field in the setup screen,
this field is of critical importance.

2.6.2 There are four tests to select from: Air, Tank, Temperature, and
Repeatability.

2.6.3 Next the user can select what parameter will be used to terminate the test.
The program only allows valid termination criteria. The user should select
a different method if the program rejects the selected parameter.

2.6.4 If the tool under test is an RNT, the user has additional choices highlighted
for testing the gamma sensor in the tool. All three buttons can be selected
during a temperature test, however, the {Run Cold…}buttons can be
selected during air and tank testing.

I-18 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 18 of 70

Figure 9 Test Specification Screen

2.6.5 The {Sample Rate} should typically be set to 30 or 60 seconds. When


running an RNT tool, the gamma data requires a long averaging time and
therefore, 30 seconds should be selected. Selecting zero will cause the
program to collect data as fast as it can. No allowance is made for the
minimum cycle time of the tool, so data may be repeated or incorrect.

2.6.6 {Soak Time} is the period, in hours, over which the Watlow oven
controller will maintain the soak temperature. The soak temperature is the
maximum temperature that is set in the Stop on Max Temp Field.

2.6.7 The two following fields are blank in Figure 10, but are used to display the
data base file name selected for this test. This can be viewed after the test
has started.

2.6.8 Selecting [OK] saves the data entry in the screen. <Esc> or [Cancel]
returns the screen to its original values.

User’s Guide I-19


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 19 of 70

2.6.9 Air Tests

A. Selecting the {Air Test} radio button causes the program to collect
and store data for Air Hang correction data. The Watlow controller is
not programmed. To start the test the user must select either the
[Start Test] or [Append Test] buttons in the Utility Screen, see
Figure 10.

Figure 10 Utility Screen: Ready to Start a Test

B. The test will run to termination, usually the number of samples. The
user can then select the [Print] button in the Utility screen to print out
the data and results.

C. While the test is running, the user may view the data by selecting
either the [Data View] or the [Graph View] buttons in the Utility
Screen.

2.6.10 Temperature Test

A. Selecting the {Temperature Test} radio button causes the program to


collect and store data once the test has started. In addition, the
program downloads a Watlow Oven Controller temperature profile.
The profile downloaded is specified by the {Tool Type}, {Sub Size},
and {Oven Type} fields. The {Soak Time} field causes the profile to
be adjusted to reflect the soak time selected. If the tool is an RNT,
then the program will perform a Gamma Plateau test at 25 and 150°C,

I-20 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 20 of 70

if the Plateau radio buttons are selected (see Figure 10). The user may
also select to Profile the Gamma at any time by selecting the [Profile]
button in the Utility Screen.

B. The test terminates on the parameters selected in the Test


Specification Screen. Selecting Temperature as the terminator causes
the program to check the RNT internal temperature sensor for the
“End” temperature.

CAUTION: There is no temperature sensor in the MPR tool,


therefore, an external temperature sensor
(P/N 49508-101) is screwed into the data dump port prior
to starting the test. This is then connected to the MTSI
DPR Detector module where the temperature is read by
the program.

C. If the test is set to stop on the maximum number of samples, the


program will always shut down the Watlow heater controller when
the maximum temperature has been achieved, but will continue
gathering data until the maximum number of samples are reached.

D. While the test is running, the user may view the data by selecting
either the [Data View] or the [Graph View] buttons in the Utility
Screen.

2.6.11 Tank Test

A. Selecting the {Tank Test} radio button causes the program to collect
and store data once the test has started. As with the Air Test there is
no requirement to setup the Watlow Oven controller. The only
difference between this test and the Air test is that the Conductivity
on the tank fluid must be found and entered into the Test
Specification screen. This value is then used to compare to the values
calculated by the program.

B. This test also downloads the Air Hang data that was stored in the tool
for subtracting the Air Hang offsets when calculating the apparent
resistivity of the tank. In the event there is no Air Hang data available
in the tool, the program will inform the user to perform this test and
store the data to the tool. This is done so proper verification and
operation of the tool is achieved.

User’s Guide I-21


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 21 of 70

2.6.12 Sample Rate

A. The {Sample Rate} field is specified in seconds from 0-100.


Selecting 0 causes the program to collect data as fast as possible.
There is no effort made to verify that the UUT is able to provide valid
data at this rate (1.25 seconds is the fastest data rate of the tool and 30
seconds if Gamma data is being collected). Under normal
circumstances a data rate of 30 seconds should be selected.

1. Effect on Gamma Plateau


• The Gamma system requires at least 30 seconds to obtain a
valid average. This means that the program sample period when
collecting Gamma data should be set to 30 seconds. When
performing a Plateau test this means that it takes a very long
time to collect all the data.

2.7 Utility Screen

2.7.1 Figure 11 shows the Utility Screen. This screen is the central point of the
system when a test is running. All functions associated with the control,
termination, and display of a test can be performed from this screen.

Figure 11 Utility Screen: Ready to Start a Test

I-22 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 22 of 70

2.7.2 Figure 11 shows the screen as it would be seen immediately after the Test
Specification and the View Setup Screens have been completed. The user
is ready at this point to start a test. A test may be started in one of two
ways. First by selecting the [Start Test] button or secondly by selecting
[Append Test].

2.7.3 Append Test

A. Selecting the [Append Test] button causes the program to display a


screen to allow the user to specify which test Data Base file to append
the test data to, as seen in Figure 12. If the user leaves the
{Test Type} field at <UNK> the program assumes the user wishes to
view all the available tests to which data can be appended. The
program will display the File Selection Box. When the user passes
through the {Database File 1} field the program checks to ensure the
file name selected is valid. If not, again the program will display the
File Selection Box. When the screen is first entered the program
makes a best guess at the file name for data append. This file name is
the last Database file created by the system. When [Ok] is selected
the program starts a test as normal except that the sample number is
incremented to the last sample of the selected file.

Figure 12 Utility Screen: Append Test

User’s Guide I-23


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 23 of 70

2.7.4 Starting a Test

A. Starting a test, using the [Start Test] button in the Utility Screen, will
result in the Test State Machine being initiated. The user will see a
series of messages placed on the status bar which will change as the
program collects data. The rate at which these messages are displayed
depends on the acquisition time selected in the Test Specification
Screen.

B. The program will collect data and store it in a file until either the test
is terminated by the user or the program determines the test criteria
set in the Test Specification Screen are satisfied.

C. Once a test is started, the [Pause Test] button becomes active.


Selecting this button allows the user to perform some external task
before continuing the test (such as setting up the Watlow Oven). In
order to use the computer for some other function, and then return to
the test, the user should stop the test first. To continue the test,
re-enter the program but do not change either the Setup or Test
Specification Screens (unless desired) and then select the [Append
Test] key.

2.7.5 Other Utility Functions

A. The user may select to view the data being collected through the
[Data View] Screen, the [Graph View] Screen or the [Debug View]
screen, see sections 2.8, 2.9, 2.10. Before the Data View Screen can
be viewed the user must complete the [Print Setup] Screen, see
section 2.7.7. This screen determines how the Data View and Result
printouts are formatted.

B. If errors occur while a test is running the user will receive an audible
tone. To view the errors select the [Errors] button. A screen will
display the last forty errors recorded along with error codes and time
at which they occurred.

C. If the UUT is an RNT tool the user may initiate a Gamma [Plateau] at
any time. The user can view the results from the [Graph View]
function.

D. Once the test has completed, the user must select the [View/Print]
button in order to produce test results from the data base file.
Selecting this button will cause the system to create a print out, as

I-24 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 24 of 70

specified by the Print Setup Screen. It is very important to understand


the relationship between this screen and what is seen in both the Data
View function and on a print out, see section 2.7.7.

E. The user may leave the Utility screen by selecting [Quit] or pressing
the <Esc> key. The program will not allow the user to [Quit] or
<Esc> while a test is running. The test must be stopped or paused
first.

2.7.6 Watlow Program

A. When a temperature test is started the program downloads a profile


file to the Watlow Oven Controller. There are profile files for each of
the different sub sizes and types. The program determines which one
to load based on the values of the {Sub Type}, {Sub Size}, and
{Oven Type} fields found in the Test Specification and System Setup
screens.

CAUTION: It is very important to ensure that these fields are correct


and reflect the test setup being used. Failure to do this
could cause irreparable damage to the UUT.

B. The {Soak Time} field found in the Test Specification screen is used
to adjust the Watlow profile so that is will hold the UUT at a given
temperature for the selected time.

C. The test program periodically (once per minute) checks the Watlow
temperatures. If they are out of range the program provides the user
with a five minute window in which to correct the problem before
terminating the test.

2.7.7 Print Setup Screen

A. As can be seen in Figure 13, the Print Setup Screen contains fields
which can be used to select items from the data base to be displayed
or printed. It is important to understand the relationship between what
is specified in this screen and what is displayed in the Data View
Screen, see section 2.8.1. In general, this is a WYSIWYG system.
Selecting data base fields in the print setup screen causes those fields
to be displayed in the Data Base View Screen. What you see in that
screen is what will be printed to the printer when [Print] is selected in
the Utility Screen.

User’s Guide I-25


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 25 of 70

Figure 13 Print Setup Screen

B. If a wrong entry is made on any line, press the <Space Bar> to reset
to default value and then re-enter the data.
Table 2:

Acronym Screen Ranges


where: R Receiver 1,2
T Transmitter 1,2,3,4
F Frequency 1=400 k, 2=2M

2.7.8 Print Database and Report Types

A. {Single page Test Summary}prints the averages of all the data


collected for each type of test. At the end of the printout will be a pass
fail summary on certain parameters acquired during the testing. A
sample printout of an MPR Air Hang test is shown in Appendix A: in
section 0.

B. {Error Report Log} prints only those records which recorded an error
during acquisition. These errors can be associated with a system error
or with a test limit error. See section 5.4 sample printout of an MPR
Air Hang.

I-26 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 26 of 70

C. The {Std, Dev, Ave, Pass/Fail} button is used to cause the program to
display only the Mean Standard Deviation, Maximum and Minimum
data calculated by the program. See Figure 16. These calculations are
used in checking for the UUTs conformity to the performance
specifications. See section 2.7.11, Test Pass/Fail Criteria. Also, see
section 5.4 for a sample printout of an MPR Air Hang.

D. The above reports will all look similar for the AIR, TEMP, and
TANK tests, however, in some instances, the tested values will be
different.

E. {Print Full} and {Print Brief} print all results in all the associated
user selected data fields. Print Brief selects every 5th record for Air
and Tank tests and every 1°C for Temperature test data.

F. {Print All} results in all the data records, being printed. This can be
quite large, and generally will not print to the screen. It is
recommended that this be printed to a file and imported into a word
processor which can handle files of this size. If it is printed to the
printer, it will take up a large amount of paper and time to complete.

Figure 14 Print Setup: Data Base Variable List

G. {Print To File} allows the program to print the data to the file name
specified in the {Print File Name} field. This feature produces ASCII
comma delimited records of data which will be useful for reading the
data into an external spreadsheet or data base program.

User’s Guide I-27


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 27 of 70

H. The {Number of Fields to Print} field is used to specify how many


fields are to be displayed or printed. The maximum number of data
fields which can be printed to a printer is 13. However, up to 20 fields
can be specified, the last 7 fields will appear on a second line. There
are 72 data base variables, so the user will have to create several
Printer Configuration files in order to specify all the data base
variables.

I. Figure 14 shows a partial list of data base which is displayed when


the user hits the space bar in any of the PRT## fields. This list is
partial because (refer to section 2.8.2) there are several qualifiers
which are required for some of the variables. These are Receiver
number (1-2), Transmitter number (1-2 RNT/USR, 1-4 MPR) and
Frequency (400 kHz, 2 MHz). These qualifiers do not apply to the
Gamma, Temperature, and Total Gravity Field variables. The
qualifiers are specified in the {T}transmitter, {R}receiver and
{F}frequency fields found in the screen.

J. Selecting the variables required for any printout should be done


remembering the following:
• The user should put Time in one of the first three fields.
• Sample number is useful and should probably be placed in the
first field.
• For Temperature tests, Temperature should be reported in the
second field, if Time or Sample Number are in the first field.
• Create Print Setup configuration files which group like data
together.
• Selecting the {Std Dev, Ave, Pass/Fail} function reserves the
first two fields for the sample number and a list of variable type
(Average, Standard Deviation, Min., and Max.).

2.7.9 Creating a Print Configuration File

A. In order to save a Date Base View created in the Print Setup Screen,
(see section 2.7.7) the user must save a configuration file. This is
done through the [Config File] button. Selecting this button causes
the program to present the user with an option to either create a new
configuration file or use and existing one. To create a new file answer
[Yes] to the dialog box question. The user must then supply the name

I-28 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 28 of 70

in the File Box. Selecting [Ok], in the File Box screen, will save the
contents of the Print Setup Screen to a configuration file with the
name specified. See Figure 15.

Figure 15 Print Setup Screen: Configuration Files

B. In order to retrieve the saved configuration select the [Config File]


button and answer [No] to the dialog question “Create new config
file?”. The program will display the File Box with ‘*.pfg’ filled in the
{File} field. Using the gray <+> key causes a list of files with the
“pfg” extension to be displayed. Use the Arrow keys to select the file
you wish to use and hit the <Enter> key. The user can create a series
of configuration files which will provide various printout types.

2.7.10 Printing Results

A. When a test is completed the user can select the [Print] button in the
View/Print Setup Screen. This button will cause the program to
produce a printout based on the setup found in the Print Setup screen.
There are three types of print out which can be generated.
• Print Single Page Summary: This will print the averages of all
the collected data and create a Pass/Fail table at the end of the

User’s Guide I-29


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 29 of 70

file for certain specified parameters dependent upon the type of


test that was chosen.
• Print Error Report Log: By selecting this check box, the
program will search the data base for any records which contain
errors and then print them.
• Print Std Dev, Ave., Pass/Fail: By selecting this check box the
program will print the Average, Standard Deviation, Min. and
Max. as it is calculated for each record.
• All three of the above can be selected together to print all report
to a file or printer.
• Selecting either Brief of Full print, will print out records from
the data base dependant upon the user selected data fields. Brief
print will print only every 5th value for Air and Tank test or a
record every 1°C of temperature change in a Temperature test.
Full Print prints every record in any Data Base file.
• Selecting All print, will print out all the records from the data
base.

2.7.11 Test Pass/Fail Criteria

A. Because the Phase and Amplitude variables are used to create the
final Compensated Phase and Attenuation values (also the phase and
attenuation Resistivity values) the program only checks the final,
resultant, variables with the Pass/Fail Criterion. At present these
variables are checked as follows:
Table 3: Variables

Variable (CpPhDiff) Variable (CpAttnDiff)


Tool Size
Compensated Phase Compensated
3-1/8 in. USMPR
(Degrees) Attenuation (db)
2 MHz Long -0.25 to 0.75 5.6 to 6.0
400 kHz Long -0.35 to 0.65 5.6 to 6.0
4-3/4 in. MPR
2 MHz Long -1.00 to 0.50 5.4 to 6.1
400 kHz Long -0.50 to 1.00 6.4 to 7.1
2 MHz Short -1.50 to 0.50 8.3 to 8.9
400 kHz Short -0.50 to 1.00 10.4 to 11.1
RNT

I-30 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 30 of 70

Table 3: Variables

Variable (CpPhDiff) Variable (CpAttnDiff)


Tool Size
Compensated Phase Compensated
3-1/8 in. USMPR
(Degrees) Attenuation (db)
2 MHz Long -1.00 to 0.50 5.3 to 6.0
400 kHz Long -1.00 to 0.50 6.2 to 6.9
6-3/4 & 8-1/4 in. MPR
2 MHz Long -0.25 to 0.75 5.3 to 5.7
400 kHz Long -0.50 to 0.50 5.3 to 5.7
2 MHz Short -0.30 to 1.30 8.2 to 8.6
400 kHz Short -0.30 to 0.70 8.2 to 8.6

All Tools Standard 0.01 0.001


Deviation

Temperature Testing
Compensated ±0.4 ±0.04
Relative Single ±10 ±1.0
Transmitter
Absolute ±25 ±6
Tank Resistivity ±10% ±10%

2.8 Data Base View Display

2.8.1 The Data Base View Screen is reached from the Utility Menu via the
[Data View] button. This screen displays the data already saved in the data
base and any new data that is collected during viewing. The top line
displays the names of the variables being displayed from the data base.
These variables are selected in the Print Setup Screen, see section 2.7.7.
The user can move about the data screen by using the left, right and up,
down arrows. Page Up and Page Down allow the user to page through the
data. Remember, when data is being collected the program will place the
cursor at the last record every time new data is collected. If the user wishes
to study the data for an extended period of time the test should be paused
from the Utility screen before viewing the data. Up to twenty data base
variables can be displayed by this screen.

User’s Guide I-31


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 31 of 70

B. Database Display Views

1. Figure 16 and Figure 17 show the two types of displays


available.

Figure 16 Data View Screen: Ave., Std Dev, Max, Min

2. Figure 16 show all the data in a compact form of Average,


Deviation, etc. This is useful for checking if data is staying with
in certain limits bounds. This data can be displayed running real
time while a test is being run, or in the review data form after
the test has been completed.

3. Figure 17 shows the running data form. This will update and
scroll as each sample is acquired, or can be paged through with
the <Page Up> and <Page Dn> keys on the keyboard.

I-32 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 32 of 70

Figure 17 Data View Screen: Gathered Data

C. Editing Data in the Data Base

1. Data in the data base can be edited for removal from


calculations. While the edited data will not be used to formulate
any calculated results, the data will still be present in the data
file for future reference.

2. The data can be edited while a test is running, but it is not


recommended. The most useful time to edit data is after
completion of the test. This is when the user has more time to
view and contemplate which data is to be excluded.

3. There are three function keys which enable the edit function.
<F5>, <F5>, <F7>.

4. <F5> Marks the beginning and end of a block of data. The mark
is invisible to the user, and toggles each time the user presses
this key.

5. <F6> Sets the marked area to the ERROR state. When this is
seen be the code during calculations, this record is ignored, and
the next record is loaded.

6. <F7> Clears the marked area of the ERROR state.

User’s Guide I-33


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 33 of 70

D. Example of Editing Data

Referring to Figure 17 and Figure 18, we see the data in the unedited
form and the edited form. To edit data from the database, perform the
following procedure.

Figure 18 Data View Screen: Edited Data

1. Scroll to beginning of the data in question. In Figure 18, this is


record 3.

2. Press the <F5> key to mark the beginning of the block.

3. Scroll to the end of the data in question. In Figure 18, this is


record 7.

4. Press <F6> key to set the data record to ERROR. This will
allow the exclusion of this data in calculations and graphs.

E. Multiple blocks of non-contiguous data can be edited in the same


way. This is accomplished by utilizing the above steps, exiting the
data base view screen, reentering the data base view screen and
marking another block.

2.8.2 Contents of Data Base

F. The following is a list of variables stored in the data base file.

I-34 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 34 of 70

Description Bytes

Record Marker - the Mark is not displayed


by the program char Mark [6]; 6

Sample Number
WORD SampleNo; 2

Sample Time Unix Format


time_t SampTime; 4

Temperature
float Temp; 4

Converted Raw data from Tool


Eng Units DBs and degree
float Phase [RCVR][XMTR][FREQ]; 2 * 4 * 2 = 16 64
float Attn [RCVR][XMTR][FREQ]; 2 * 4 * 2 = 16 64

Phase Difference and Atten. Ratios (diff of Receivers)


float PhDiff [XMTR][FREQ]; 4*2=8 32
float AttnRat [XMTR][FREQ]; 4*2=8 32

Compensated Phase Difference and Atten Ratios


float CpPhDiff[XMTR/2][FREQ]; 2 * 2 = 4 16
float CpAttnRat [XMTR/2][FREQ]; 2 * 2 = 4 16

Compensated Resistivity Phase Difference and Atten Ratios


float ResPhiDiff[XMTR/2][FREQ]; 2 * 2 = 4 16
float ResAttnRat [XMTR/2][FREQ];2 * 2 = 4 16

Other Readings (rnt only)


float HVC; Gamma High Voltage Control 4
float GM; Gamma Ray counts, with source 4
float BGGM; Gamma Ray counts, background 4
float TG; Total Gravity 4

int Error; The highest level error detected 2

Total Size 290 bytes


Total Num vars 72

User’s Guide I-35


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 35 of 70

2.9 Graphics Display

2.9.1 The user may also view data via the Graph Screen. This screen is reached
from the Utility Screen by selecting the [Graph View] button. Figure 19
shows the screen as it may appear after a Graphics configuration file has
been created. The first time the screen is loaded it presents a default screen
which may not show any data. The screen must be setup to show data.

Figure 19 Graph Screen

2.9.2 The data base variables selected in the {Y1}, {Y2}, {Y3}, {Y4} and {X}
fields are displayed on the screen. Only the data that appears within the
scales specified are displayed. The maximum amount of data which can be
displayed is 8000 points. This is memory limited. Four traces means that
the maximum data would be 2000 points per trace.

2.9.3 Notice that selecting a new data base variable changes the scale text
automatically. This can be overridden in the Setup Screen.

2.10 Graph Screen: Zoom

2.10.1 The user can use the [Zoom In] and [Zoom Out] buttons to change the scale
of the data by a factor of two (larger or smaller).

I-36 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 36 of 70

2.10.2 The [Print] button produces a print out of the screen on either a laser jet or
a dot matrix printer. The dot matrix is default. To print to a LaserJet the
Graphics.com program must be initialized differently, see the DOS manual
for more detail. It is recommended that the /R mode be used with
Graphics.com for clearer prints.

2.10.3 The [Config Button] performs the same as in Print Setup Screen
(see section 2.7.7) but uses the *.gfg extension for configuration files.

2.11 Graph Screen: Setup

2.11.1 Selecting the [Setup] button from the screen causes the program to display
the Graphics Setup Screen as shown in Figure 20. This screen can be used
to modify the scales, colors, axis names, and number of traces (or plots) to
display.

Figure 20 Graph Screen: Setup Menu

2.11.2 Selecting {Lines On} causes the program to put a line between each data
point displayed. Sometimes, dots can be more useful especially if the user
is looking for a pattern in scattered data points.

2.11.3 Selecting {Grid On} will cause the Grid to be displayed. The user may
wish to remove the grid if {Two Y Scales} is selected, two different scales
can be confusing with a grid, since the right hand scale will probably not
line up with the grid graticules.

User’s Guide I-37


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 37 of 70

2.12 Graph Screen: Two Scale Operation

2.12.1 The {Two Y Scales} function is used to display two dissimilar types of
data, (Phase and Attenuation) which may not have the same range, on the
same graph. When selected a right hand scale appears on the graph. The Y1
and Y3 variables are assigned to the left scale and the Y2 and Y4 variables
are assigned to the right scale.

2.12.2 The user can change the scale ranges. Typically for a temperature test the
{X Min} and {X Max} would be set to 0-170 respectively. This scale
would represent temperature. The Y scales should be set to reflect the
range of the data being displayed.

2.13 Graph Screen: Displaying Gamma Plateau Data

2.13.1 When running a RNT UUT it is possible to display Gamma Plateau data,
along with the High Voltage Supply data. There is an example
configuration file showing this feature with the name Gamma.gfg. The
Gamma data is placed on the Y axis and the High Voltage PS data is placed
on the X axis.

2.14 Graph Setup Screen: Changing Plot and Grid Colors

2.14.1 As can be seen in Figure 21, the user can select any color from a palate.
This palate is accessed by selecting the <+> key when in the Color field the
user wishes to change. Move through the palette with the cursor key and
presses <Enter> when the correct color has been selected.

I-38 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 38 of 70

Figure 21 Graph Screen: Setup: Color Selection

2.15 Graphics Configuration Files

2.15.1 As with the Print Setup Screen the user can save the setup created to a
configuration file. This is done by selecting the [Config File] button. As
before the user is asked “Create a new file?”. Answering [Yes] will result
in the File Box being displayed. The user enters the file name and selects
[Ok]. This will save the configuration file. In order to retrieve the file the
user should answer [No] to the “Create new file?” question and then when
in the {File} field of the File Selection Box hit the <+> key to see a list of
available configuration files. See Figure 22.

User’s Guide I-39


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 39 of 70

Figure 22 Graph Screen: Configuration File Selection

2.16 Debug View Data

2.16.1 The debug screen is a useful tool for verifying the proper operation of all
transmitters/receivers and support equipment quickly and easily.

2.16.2 In order to load the Debug view, a few questions as to which tool is being
used are required to be answered. After these are answered, the program
will load the debug screen and commence acquiring data.

2.16.3 RNT Debug Data View Screen

A. As can be seen in Figure 23, the RNT data show both transmitter and
both frequency data. Along with this data, data from the Near Bit
Inclinometer and Gamma (NBIG) is also displayed.

I-40 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 40 of 70

Figure 23 RNT Debug Screen

B. The SRFix field keeps track of a verified problem with some


MC68332 masks. The problem relates to the handling of the stack
during preparation of responding to an interrupt. These defective
MC68332's would occasionally forget to push the SR register onto
the stack. Consequently, upon an RTE (return from exception) the SR
register would get corrupted. All MPR/RNT MC68332 downhole
code interrupt service routines check for this problem and presently
have the ability to avert serious ramifications.

C. The EXCEPTIONS field refers to other 68332 features where it has


the ability to trap problems such as spurious interrupts, Bus errors,
divide by zero, etc. An applications programmer will find this
information very helpful for determining the actual problem. Refer to
the MC68332 User's Manual under the Exception Handling chapter.

User’s Guide I-41


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 41 of 70

Figure 24 MPR/USR Debug Screen

D. The MPR and the USMPR use the same Debug screen. The only
difference will be when acquiring data with the USMPR, data in the
transmitter 3 and 4 field will be all zeroes. This is due to the fact there
are no transmitters present.

E. While in the Debug screen modes, the tool will always check for
errors in calculated acquisition parameters and an error message will
be displayed on the message bar.

2.17 Reviewing Data

2.17.1 The user can review the old data base files by selecting the [Review Data]
button from the Main Menu. The program will make a best guess at the file
name of the data base file the user wishes to review. If this file name is not
correct the user must specify the {Sub Type}, {Sub S/N}, and {Test Type}.
Specifying the {Test Type} as <Unk> results in the program creating a file

I-42 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 42 of 70

name with a ‘*’ file specification. This allows the user to pop up the File
Selection Box and using the <+> key select one of the data base files saved
on disk.

Figure 25 Review Debug Screen

2.17.2 As can be seen in Figure 26, the user can pop up a list of test types by
pressing the <Space> bar when over the {Test Type} field.

2.17.3 Once the user is satisfied with the file name, selecting [Ok] in the Review
Screen will cause the program to go to the Utility Screen. The user will not
be able to start or append a test. The only functions which operate in the
Utility Screen, when in the Data Review mode, are the [Graph View] and
[Data View] functions. Selecting the [System Setup] or
[Test Specification] button will result in the display of the screens but no
changes can be made. If the user wishes to make changes to the Data Base
file or append data, then a test must be started and the [Append] data
function selected from the Utility Screen, see section 2.7.1.

User’s Guide I-43


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 43 of 70

Figure 26 Review Screen: Test Type Selection

2.18 Air Hang Screen/Tables

2.18.1 After performing an Air Hang test in the appropriate area, the data can be
reviewed in the Air Hang test screen to see if the data passed the criteria
stated in Table 2.

2.18.2 This data can be stored into the MPR or RNT EEPROM for retrieval at the
wellsite. The data stored are the raw Phases and Attenuations gathered
during the test. These values are evaluated for their standard deviation and
a Pass/Fail note is displayed. The Compensated Phases and Attenuations,
while displayed are not loaded into the tool. They are included for more
precise data evaluation.

2.19 Air Hang Editor Data Screens

2.19.1 Both the MPR and the RNT use the same Air Hang screen, however,
because the RNT and the USMPR do not have a third and fourth
transmitter, some of the fields will be blank or zero.

I-44 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 44 of 70

2.19.2 When first selected, the user is prompted to select the data either from the
tool or the Air Hang database. See Figure 27 and Figure 28.

Figure 27 Air Hang Data Screen: Data Select

Figure 28 Air Hang Data Screen (RNT Type)

User’s Guide I-45


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 45 of 70

2.19.3 If data is selected from the database, the last file of the resistivity sub S/N
that was chosen in the test setup screen will be loaded and displayed. To
load an older data base file, the [Review Data] button should be selected
from the [Main Menu] and the file loaded per section 2.17. Then proceed to
the [Air Hang Editor] selection. If the database file is not present, a
warning will be displayed. See Figure 31.

2.19.4 If data is selected from the tool, Communication is established with the
tool, and the data is loaded. There will be no Pass/Fail criteria or
Compensated data shown on the screen in this case. The Pass Fail is not
checked, as it is assumed that the data that is loaded into the tool is and
should be good data from the service base, and the Compensated data is not
stored to the tool.

2.19.5 After the data has been loaded into the fields, it can then be saved to the
tool.

CAUTION: Saving data that was loaded from the tool will just
overwrite the data with the same data, however, saving
data that was loaded from the database, will overwrite
with new data.

2.19.6 In the event the software detects errors in the database data and the
operator attempts to save this data, a Warning will appear. See Figure 29.
This Warning screen will not prevent the user from loading Failed data, but
is provided as a cautionary screen before proceeding. If the user wishes to
cancel this operation, pressing cancel will step back to the previous screen.
Pressing OK will start data being downloaded to the EEPROM and RAM.

I-46 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 46 of 70

Figure 29 Air Hang Data Screen: Error Warning

2.19.7 After pressing [EEPROM] the program will check to see if the password
level is high enough for this function. If it is too low, it will go to a
password prompt and ask the user to enter a higher level password.

2.19.8 Pressing [Cancel] will allow the user to go back to the previous menu after
displaying the message seen in Figure 30.

User’s Guide I-47


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 47 of 70

Figure 30 Air Hang Data Screen: Esc or Cancel

Figure 31 Air Hang Data Screen: Database File Error

I-48 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 48 of 70

2.20 Ktable Editor

2.20.1 This function allows configuring of the MPR/RNT for downhole operation.
The table is contained in EEPROM (i.e., non-volatile storage) and can be
viewed and edited via this function. However, non-expert access to change
data has been limited by password control (see section 2.4.9) of the table.

2.20.2 The acquisition time is specified in seconds and determines how long the
system should sample at ONE transmitter at ONE frequency. For example,
the total acquisition time for a two-transmitter system using one frequency
is (using the above acquisition time).

1.25 seconds * 2 Transmitters * 1 Frequency = 2.5 seconds.

2.20.3 Another example, the total acquisition time for a four-transmitter system
using two frequencies is (using the above acquisition time).

1.25 seconds * 4 Transmitters * 2 Frequency = 10 seconds.

2.20.4 The number of frequencies to use during a measurement is specified by the


“Number Of Frequencies” field. If this number is 1 then the value in field
“Frequency #1” is used (Frequency #2 is not used).

2.20.5 The number of transmitters to use during a measurement is specified by the


“Number Of Transmitters” field. If this number is 2 then the values in
fields “1st Transmitter” and “2nd Transmitter” are used.

2.20.6 The Gamma Serial Numbers are text only fields and are not used during the
measurements. Presently, only Gamma High voltage #1 is used. Gamma
High voltage #2 has no function. The pulse width period is changeable to
allow experimentation during lab conditions. Nominal value should be
255.

2.20.7 The IQMOD table is typically only used for MPR tools and should never
be modified by non-experts.

User’s Guide I-49


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 49 of 70

2.21 NCO Table Editor

Figure 32 NCO Node Select Screen

2.21.1 The NCO Table Editor function allows for setting each and every
parameter of the AD7008 as well as editing the EEPROM resident
configuration table (in the 68HC11).

2.21.2 To rename a node enter the new name under Node Name.

Note: Renaming a node comes in handy during tool and board assembly
where, conceivably, it is possible to mount a transmitter board in
the wrong location. Rather than physically moving the board, the
same can be accomplished by renaming it.

2.21.3 The Frequency Acquisition time determines how long the pulse
accumulator should count NCO output pulses before completing a
measurement. Maximum acquisition time is 0.42 seconds and is also the
recommended setting.

2.21.4 The 68HC11 register can also be modified.

Note: Normal configuration value is 0x0Bh. Refer to the 68HC11 data


book for significance (COP should be enabled). After editing, the
system MUST BE reset in order for the new value to take effect
(refer to 68HC11 CONFIG register setting in Motorola manual).

I-50 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 50 of 70

2.21.5 The communications timeout allows the 68HC11 system to set a watchdog
timer (the time is set by the table value, in milliseconds) during which if no
SPI communications are seen from the 68332 then the status bit in the
ADAM Bus status word is set. A value of 65535 (0xFFFFh) means that this
function is disabled (i.e., status bit will never be set).

2.21.6 The A/D conversion table is also programmable. This allows for changes to
be made to the boards without reprogramming the 68HC11 application
code.

2.21.7 This screen, unlike most will allow the user to change data prior to
changing the password. However, if the [Save NCO] button is pressed, and
the password level is too low, a password error will be displayed, and
re-entry of the correct password (see section 2.4.9) will be required to save
the data. This will download any changes made to the Data to the
appropriate Nodes RAM.

Figure 33 NCO Node Acquiring Data From Tool

User’s Guide I-51


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 51 of 70

3 Troubleshooting
3.1 Communication Problems

3.1.1 The most common problem with the system is caused by an incorrectly
setup communications port. The system requires three ports. These are as
follows:
• Com1 - Communicate to the UUT via the 9 pin serial port on the
MTSI Box
• Com4 - Fastcomm port 2 to the Watlow Controller.
• Com5 - Fastcomm port 3 to the MTSI controller itself.

3.1.2 The MTSI controller address is “a2”.

3.2 Missing Files

3.2.1 If the program fails to load, take note of any messages left displayed on the
screen. If the help file, screen file or resistivity table files are missing the
program will issue a warning and may terminate if essential files are not
present. These files can be copied from the release disk.

3.3 Erroneous File Logging

3.3.1 At times when a new version is issued, there may be errors logging data to
the proper file/Sub-directory. This can resolved by erasing the
MPRRNT.CFG file and allowing the software to generate a new default
configuration.

4 Configuration Files and System Setup


4.1 Satellite Test Rack System

4.1.1 The purpose of this procedure is to allow the user to install both the
hardware and software required to operate the Satellite Test Rack System.
There are two software driver sections as this code can run on one of two
possible platforms, PCs with EISA or ISA Bus systems. This procedure
does not discuss implementation under Window 3.X or OS/2. The
supported Operating System (OS) is DOS 5.0. There are two software
installation sections, one dealing with drivers required for the hardware and
the other with the end user software for testing. The driver software section
also discusses the correct setup of both the AUTOEXEC.BAT and
CONFIG.SYS files.

I-52 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 52 of 70

4.2 Equipment Requirements


• 1 IBM PC 386 or equivalent. Clock speed > 20 MHz. (System can be run on
this, but a IBM 486 Clo speed > 166 MHz is recommended)
• 3 Open Slots.
• 1 Meg of RAM, preferably on the mother card.
• 1 - 200 Meg Hard Drive (or greater).
• 1 - 1.2 Meg Floppy Drive.
• 1 - 1.44 Meg Floppy Drive.
• 1 Serial Ports (or more).
• 1 Parallel Ports (or more).
• 1 EGA Color Monitor (or better).
• 1 4 Port FastCom Serial communications card and software drivers.
• 1 PIO12 card.
• 1 National Instruments GPIB card and software drivers.
• 1 Set of EISA setup software (for EISA hardware installation).
• 1 Anti Static wrist strap correctly terminated via a resistor to ground.
• Paper and pencil to record jumper settings.

4.2.1 Equipment Preparation. Before starting the installation, ensure that your
hard drive has been correctly formatted and DOS 6.x or greater is installed.
Also remove the cover from the PC. If there are any other PC cards present
in the PC which deal with IO or communications these must either be
removed or their interrupt and address jumper settings found. These must
then be checked and changed as required to ensure they do not conflict
with the settings found in Figure 35, Figure 36, and Figure 37.

Note: If you are installing the Hardware on an EISA machine DO NOT


install the Cards until you have completed section 0 of this
procedure.

4.2.2 This is because the EISA Bus setup must be run with no new cards present
in the system. There may be further complication created by the existence
of Network card. If the jumper settings must be changed on an existing
installed card it will have to be removed before executing the EISA setup
program.

User’s Guide I-53


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 53 of 70

4.2.3 EISA Software Setup

A. Ensure the cards which you are about to setup for the EISA Bus are
removed from the computers card cage.

B. At present with Compaq computers there are two ways in which an


EISA installation can be performed. The first relies on the Compaq
Setup and Utilities disks provided with the computer and the second
relies on a built in program on the Boot sector of the hard drive. You
can tell if the Compaq PC you are about to install is of the second
variety. To do this, reboot the PC and check to see if the cursor moves
to the top right hand corner of the screen. If so press the <F10> and
the Setup program will start. The first type of PC installation is the
same for most other EISA machines. you must have the installation
disks and place the Setup disk in Drive A: or B: For Compaq's the
program to run is a:\CF.exe. This is different for other types of
machines.

4.2.4 PIO12 Setup

A. When presented with the first screen, select the Add/Remove boards
function. This will display a screen with a list of slots for the PC and
the type of boards presently installed. Move the cursor to the first
available slot and press the <Enter> key. The computer will place a
list of possible drivers on the screen. Cursor down and select the
Generic Driver for this slot. This will be where we put the PIO12
card. The PC may not have the Generic Driver loaded in which case
select <F7> and place the Non Compaq drivers disk in drive A:.
Selecting this disk will produce another screen full of drivers. Load in
the Generic Driver and exit the screen. You will have to reselect the
slot for the PIO12 board and reselect the Generic Driver as above.
Note the slot number.

B. Exit the screen. Select the Change/Edit drivers option. This will
display a screen of all the boards installed in the system along with
interrupt, DMA and IO address information. You will need to edit
this data for the PIO12 board. Cursor down until you find the Generic
Driver in the slot selected for the PIO12. Select <F6> in order to
change the Resource information. Ensure the interrupt is set to none.
Do not worry about the address selected as the PIO12 uses an address
which is out of the EISA IO range. There is no DMA. Exit this
screen. Exit the Change/Edit drivers screen.

I-54 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 54 of 70

4.2.5 FastCom Card Setup

A. Perform the same steps for the FastCom Card as was done for the
PIO12 card with the following changes.

B. When in the Change/Edit screen select the F6 Edit Resources


function. Select one interrupt. Make the interrupt 5. Select 8 bytes of
I/O address space and make the address range start at 280H. Select
for No DMA. When you select OK to exit the screen, the program
will probably warn that it is moving address and interrupts around.
Check each of these Warnings to ensure the Print port and Com 1 or 2
are not disabled. If they are you probably have an other board in the
system not required by DPRIIA test. The board is probable taking
interrupts which the test code requires. Remove this extra card.

4.2.6 National Instruments GPIB Card Setup

A. Perform the same setup for the GPIB card as for the other two cards.
There is a driver specifically for the National Instruments GPIB card.
Unfortunately using this driver results in the incorrect installation of
this system. The reason is that EISA setup does not allow for
conflicting interrupts. Well the GPIB Card is designed to use the
same interrupt as the Printer. Ignore the installation of the Resources,
just ensure that nothing is altered when the Generic Driver is
installed.

B. Exit the screens and return to the main menu and Save and Exit the
setup.

C. Turn the computer off and install the cards as in the Hardware Setup
section below.

User’s Guide I-55


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 55 of 70

4.3 Hardware Setup

4.3.1 The following details the installation of each of the three cards to be
installed in an ISA PC. Please refer to Figure 35, Figure 36, and Figure 37
below for each section. Place the Anti Static strap on your wrist.

A. FastCom Card Installation


• Remove the FastCom card and cable from its protective
packaging and place the card on a conductive surface.
• Using Figure 35, ensure that both SW1 and SW2 are set
correctly.
• Select an open slot in the PC and remove the cover bracket from
the PC chassis.
• Place the FastCom in the slot.
• Connect the cable to the FastCom connector at the back of the
PC. Secure with screws provided.
• Place the software driver package aside ready for installation.

B. PIO12 Card Installation


• Remove the PIO12 circuit board from its packaging. Place it on
a conductive surface.
• Using Figure 36 and ensure that both SW1 and SW2 are
correctly set.
• Select an open slot in the PC and remove the cover bracket from
the PC chassis.
• Place the PIO12 in the slot.
• There are no software drivers for the PIO12.

I-56 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 56 of 70

C. National Instruments GPIB Card Installation


• Remove the GPIB Card from its protective packaging and place
the card on a conductive surface.
• Using Figure 37 and ensure that SW1 is set correctly.
• Select an open slot in the PC and remove the cover bracket from
the PC chassis.
• Place the GPIB card in the slot.
• Place the software driver package aside ready for installation.
• Close the computer chassis. Remove the wrist strap.

4.4 Driver and Software Installation

4.4.1 The following details both the installation of the driver software and the
changes which will be required in the AUTOEXEC.BAT and
CONFIG.SYS files.

4.4.2 FastCom Driver Installation

A. This card requires three driver files, COMMBIOS.COM,


COMMBUFF.COM and RESMEM.SYS. Both the first two files
have to be configured from software. Note that RESMEM.SYS
reserves 16 K of DOS memory for communications buffers.
• At the DOS prompt line create a new directory under root.
(i.e., mkdir c:\FASTCOM). Move to the FASTCOM directory
“cd \FASTCOM” and create a COMMBUFF and COMMBIOS
directory.
• Place the COMMBUFF driver disk in the A: drive. From the
DOS prompt type “Copy A:\*.* COMMBUFF<rtn>”
• Insert the COMMBIOS disk and type “Copy A:\*.*
COMMBIOS<rtn>”.
• Move to the COMMBUFF directory “cd COMMBUFF”.
• Type “Install”. The program will load and lead you through a
series of question about your COMMBUFF setup. You will
need the following information:
• Port FastCom Card
• Select Ports 3 - 6.(Ports 1 and 2 are COMM1 and 2
• Address 280H - same as the address in Figure 34

User’s Guide I-57


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 57 of 70

• Interrupt 5 - same as the interrupt in Figure 34


• No XON XOFF
• No FIFO.
• No Hardware Handshaking

B. Exit the program - when the last question is answered.

C. Install the COMMBIOS.COM program as follows:


• Move to the COMMBIOS directory by typing
cd..\COMMBIOS.
• Type “Install” from the command line. The program will load
as before and ask a series of questions. These can be answered
by using the information provided above.

D. When the program is finished it will create a file called


COMMBIOS.COM.

E. This finishes the first part of the FastCom driver installation.

4.4.3 National Instruments GPIB Card Driver Installation

A. The following details the driver installation for the GPIB card.

B. This card requires a single driver GPIB-PC.COM. This file requires a


software installation detailed below.
• At the DOS prompt line create a new directory under root “mkdir
c:\GPIB-PC <rtn>”. Move to the GPIB-PC directory “cd \GPIB-PC”
• Place the GPIB driver disk in the A: drive. From the DOS prompt
type “Copy A:\*.* “<rtn>”
• From the DOS prompt type “IBCONF<rtn>”. A graphical
configuration program will be loaded. Follow the instructions. The
only requirement is that the GPIB card is configured in the software
to address zero and its connected to at least one device on the Bus
(Impedance analyzer at address 11). Exit the configuration program.

C. This finishes the first part of the GPIB-PC driver installation.

4.4.4 Config.SYS Setup

A. This section gives a listing of a recommended config.sys file. Due to


differences in possible memory managers this may not be the best
setup for your system. The general requirements are as follows:

I-58 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 58 of 70

B. Load an extended memory manager (emm386, cemm386) to allow


the use of the upper memory area for drivers. Provide at least 580 K
of DOS memory for the test software.

rem [The resmem.sys driver must be the first line of the config.sys]
rem [ file ]
device=c:\FASTCOM\COMMBIOS\RESMEM.SYS

device=c:\dos\himem.sys

rem [ select the one which is appropriate ]


device=c:\dos\emm386.exe NOEMS

rem [ dos 5.0 ]


rem [dos stuff includes 500 bytes for environment space. with a]
rem [ network you may require more (1024) Also note ]
rem [ that to use ACAD rem out the emm386 statement. ACAD will work]
rem [if you use the following: emm386.exe 1024 RAM ON.This reserves]
rem [1024 for ems. The problem is that windows gets less mem to run]

BREAK=ON
SHELL=C:\DOS\COMMAND.COM C:\DOS\ /E:500 /p
DOS=HIGH,umb
DEVICEHIGH=C:\DOS\SETVER.EXE

rem [ load the GPIB-PC drivers ]


devicehigh c:\GPIB-PC\GPIB.COM

rem [ more dos stuff ]


devicehigh=c:\dos\ansi.sys
FILES=40
BUFFERS=10
LASTDRIVE=Z

4.4.5 AUTOEXEC.BAT Setup

A. The following is a listing of the recommended AUTOEXEC.BAT


file:

rem [ DOS V5.0 ]


@ECHO OFF

rem [ Load the mouse driver.]


loadhigh c:\mouse\lmouse.com

rem[Load the commbuff and commbios drivers for the FASTCOM drivers ]
lh c:\FASTCOM\COMMBIOS\COMMBIOS.com
lh c:\FASTCOM\COMMBUFF\COMMBUFF.com

lh c:\DOS\GRAPHICS.com
lh c:\iee488\drvr488.exe

User’s Guide I-59


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 59 of 70

PATH ..\;..\..;c:\dos;c:\dprtest;c:\dst

B. When the two files are setup to your satisfaction, reboot the
computer. You may use the DOS program mem.com to list the
programs in memory. Type “mem /c | more” at the DOS prompt.
Notice how the programs are distributed in memory. The best
situation should put all the drivers in the Upper Memory Blocks
(UMBs). There should be about 600 K of free DOS memory. If there
is a network card attached and you wish to be “logged in” while
running the software, ensure the network drivers are loaded high.
This will require that the network drivers be extended memory
loadable.

4.4.6 Test Rack Software Installation

A. There are several files which must be installed to perform all the tests
which this system is designed to run.

B. The released diskettes are a double sided, high density, 1.44 MB, 3.5
inch diskette. There is one diskette.

C. The files in the MPR-RNT User's Guide.ZIP are following:

Table 4: Files
MPRRNT.EXE MSDOS Executable program
MPRRNT.LNF Look-n-Feel file for screen text and graphics
MPRRNT.tbl Look-n-Feel file for specific LNF command fields
77530Q1.101 Amplitude resistivity Curve data provided by Hal Meyer
and Mac Wisler
77530Q2.101 Phase resistivity Curve data provided by Hal Meyer and
Mac Wisler
MPRRNT.HLP Online help file accessed form each screen by pressing F1
*.pfg Sample printer configuration files as have been developed
*.gfg Sample Graph configuration files as have been developed
*.pro Vertical, Horizontal, and ID temperature profiles for use
during Temperature testing

D. All of these files are installed in a sub-directory of C:\MPRRNT.

I-60 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 60 of 70

4.4.7 Installation of MPRRNT Test and Calibration Code

A. Insert the installation disk in drive A: or B:. Move to that drive


(type A: or B: as appropriate) and type “530R0XXX.exel<rtn>”
where XXX is the release version number. The installation file is a
self extracting zip file which will create the required directories and
load in code for the MPRRNT test functions. This code is loaded into
a directory called MPRRNT.

B. Following are switch settings for cards to be installed in the


computers.


_ÅÁÁÁÁÁÈ7(675$&._
_Â3&¸¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¹_¸¶¶¶¹
_¸ËÁÁÁÁÁι·076,%2;·_··
_···¸¶¶¶¶¶½_··
_·)&357·¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶·357D·'(7·¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶··
_·)&357·¶¶¶¶¶¹·357¼¶¶¶¶¶½_··
_·)&357·¶¶¶¶¶·¶¶¶¶·357·*(1·_·0·
_·)&357·¶¶¶¶¶·¶¶¶¶·357¼¶¶¶¶¶½_·3·
_····_·_·5·
_·3&&20·¶¶¶¶¶·¶¶¶¶·357E·_··
_·3&&20··¼¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶½_·5·
_··º¶¶¶¶·:$7/2:+($7(5·_·1·
_·3,2·¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶··_·7·
_··¼¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶½_··
_·*3,%·¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶·+3·_··
_º¶¶¶¶¶¶¶»··_··
_··_··
_º¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶»_º¶¶¶»


Figure 34 Connections for the MTSI DPRIIa Test System

6:6:
¸¹¸¹
RQ·àààààà·RQ·àà·
RII·àà·RII·àààààà·
º¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶»º¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶»
$GGU+,54

Figure 35 FASTCOM PC Interface Card Switch Settings

User’s Guide I-61


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 61 of 70


6:6:
¸¹¸¹
RQ·àààààà·RQ·àà·,54 'RQ
WFDUH
RII·àà·RII··
º¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶»º¶¶¶»
$GGU+

Figure 36 Keithley Metrabyte PIO12 Card Switch Settings

6:
¸¹
RQ·ààà·
RII·àààààà·
º¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶¶»

Figure 37 National Instruments IEEE488 Card Switch Settings

C. Interrupt 7. I/O Address 2E1h. DRQ1 = DMA1. The interrupt is


shared with the printer. Refer to the installation procedure for
software and hardware.

I-62 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 62 of 70

5 Appendices
5.1 Sample Single Page Data Summary Output

BAKER HUGHES INTEQ - MPRRNT (77530R0113)

TechName: bill Facility: Houston


Sub Type: MPR Sub S/N: 8888 Test Type: Air Test
Temperatures: Max: -273.05 Min: -273.2
Date/Time: Starting: Fri Dec 04 13:17:18 1998
Ending: Fri Dec 04 13:22:18 1998
Comments: Air Hang test of Cement head
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

<<<<<< ERROR REPORT >>>>>>

<<<<<< AVERAGED DATA TEST SUMMARY >>>>>>


Compensated Atten T1 FH: 5.512507 dB
Compensated Phase T1 FH: 0.3347042 deg
Attn Difference T1 FH: 5.536048 dB
Phase Difference T1 FH: 0.4453251 deg
Raw Attenuation R1 T1 FH: 1.389479 dB
Raw Phase R1 T1 FH: 107.8937 deg
Raw Attenuation R2 T1 FH: 6.925528 dB
Raw Phase R2 T1 FH: 107.4483 deg

Attn Difference T2 FH: 5.488965 dB


Phase Difference T2 FH: 0.2240832 deg
Raw Attenuation R1 T2 FH: 6.782462 dB
Raw Phase R1 T2 FH: 109.8498 deg
Raw Attenuation R2 T2 FH: 1.293498 dB
Raw Phase R2 T2 FH: 110.0739 deg

Compensated Atten T3 FH: 8.502135 dB


Compensated Phase T3 FH: 0.8568389 deg
Attn Difference T3 FH: 8.519664 dB
Phase Difference T3 FH: 0.9542952 deg
Raw Attenuation R1 T3 FH: 2.590719 dB
Raw Phase R1 T3 FH: 88.68826 deg
Raw Attenuation R2 T3 FH: 11.11038 dB
Raw Phase R2 T3 FH: 87.73399 deg

Attn Difference T4 FH: 8.484607 dB


Phase Difference T4 FH: 0.7593826 deg
Raw Attenuation R1 T4 FH: 10.7656 dB
Raw Phase R1 T4 FH: 82.42645 deg
Raw Attenuation R2 T4 FH: 2.280994 dB
Raw Phase R2 T4 FH: 83.18584 deg

Compensated Atten T1 FL: 5.504779 dB


Compensated Phase T1 FL: 0.08097682 deg
Attn Difference T1 FL: 5.379867 dB
Phase Difference T1 FL: 2.234771 deg
Raw Attenuation R1 T1 FL: 7.077685 dB

User’s Guide I-63


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 63 of 70

Raw Phase R1 T1 FL: -88.71164 deg


Raw Attenuation R2 T1 FL: 12.45755 dB
Raw Phase R2 T1 FL: -90.94626 deg

Attn Difference T2 FL: 5.629691 dB


Phase Difference T2 FL: -2.072817 deg
Raw Attenuation R1 T2 FL: 12.51715 dB
Raw Phase R1 T2 FL: -94.25665 deg
Raw Attenuation R2 T2 FL: 6.88746 dB
Raw Phase R2 T2 FL: -96.32941 deg

Compensated Atten T3 FL: 8.492384 dB


Compensated Phase T3 FL: 0.1656473 deg
Attn Difference T3 FL: 8.363553 dB
Phase Difference T3 FL: 2.314516 deg
Raw Attenuation R1 T3 FL: 9.499097 dB
Raw Phase R1 T3 FL: -72.51239 deg
Raw Attenuation R2 T3 FL: 17.86264 dB
Raw Phase R2 T3 FL: -74.82697 deg

Attn Difference T4 FL: 8.621214 dB


Phase Difference T4 FL: -1.983222 deg
Raw Attenuation R1 T4 FL: 17.9397 dB
Raw Phase R1 T4 FL: -79.05817 deg
Raw Attenuation R2 T4 FL: 9.318488 dB
Raw Phase R2 T4 FL: -81.04129 deg

Descrip. | Average | Dev Lim | StdDev | Min | Max |P/F

-----------+------------+------------+------------+----------+-------+------+---
Ph R1T1FH | 107.8937| 0.08|0.000562789| 107.8857| 107.9022|P
Ph R2T1FH | 107.4483| 0.08|0.0003814459| 107.4408| 107.4518|P
Ph R1T2FH | 109.8498| 0.08|0.0004580476| 109.8413| 109.8578|P
Ph R2T2FH | 110.0739| 0.08|0.0006651853| 110.0665| 110.0775|P
Ph R1T3FH | 88.68826| 0.08|0.0002087009| 88.68164| 88.69263|P
Ph R2T3FH | 87.73399| 0.08|0.0005252697| 87.72583| 87.73682|P
Ph R1T4FH | 82.42645| 0.08|0.0007378788| 82.41394| 82.44141|P
Ph R2T4FH | 83.18584| 0.08| 0.000490877| 83.17749| 83.19397|P
Ph R1T1FL | -88.71164| 0.08| 0.001571901| -88.72009| -88.69812|P
Ph R2T1FL | -90.94626| 0.08|0.0007542935| -90.95032| -90.93384|P
Ph R1T2FL | -94.25665| 0.08| 0.001122451| -94.2627| -94.24622|P
Ph R2T2FL | -96.32941| 0.08| 0.000782433| -96.33362| -96.31714|P
Ph R1T3FL | -72.51239| 0.08| 0.00155236| -72.52075| -72.50977|P
Ph R2T3FL | -74.82697| 0.08|0.0001672734| -74.83337| -74.82239|P
Ph R1T4FL | -79.05817| 0.08| 0.001940059| -79.0686| -79.04663|P
Ph R2T4FL | -81.04129| 0.08|0.0009020256| -81.04614| -81.03516|P
Att R1T1FH | 1.389479| 0.04|0.0006005784| 1.383383| 1.393491|P
Att R2T1FH | 6.925528| 0.04|0.0005424233| 6.919919| 6.928743|P
Att R1T2FH | 6.782462| 0.04|0.0007135652| 6.777046| 6.786305|P
Att R2T2FH | 1.293498| 0.04| 0.000638332| 1.28863| 1.296935|P
Att R1T3FH | 2.590719| 0.04|0.0005787319| 2.585978| 2.593836|P
Att R2T3FH | 11.11038| 0.04|0.0004698274| 11.10625| 11.11291|P
Att R1T4FH | 10.7656| 0.04|0.0005777808| 10.76184| 10.76871|P
Att R2T4FH | 2.280994| 0.04|0.0004469672| 2.277025| 2.283401|P

I-64 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 64 of 70

Att R1T1FL | 7.077685| 0.04|0.0004561546| 7.072359| 7.080141|P


Att R2T1FL | 12.45755| 0.04|0.0005338984| 12.45264| 12.46043|P
Att R1T2FL | 12.51715| 0.04|0.0003509614| 12.51232| 12.51904|P
Att R2T2FL | 6.88746| 0.04|0.0003598832| 6.882955| 6.889398|P
Att R1T3FL | 9.499097| 0.04|0.0002627631| 9.494974| 9.501304|P
Att R2T3FL | 17.86264| 0.04|0.0003851221| 17.8585| 17.86472|P
Att R1T4FL | 17.9397| 0.04|0.0005761503| 17.93444| 17.94281|P
Att R2T4FL | 9.318488| 0.04|0.0004941563| 9.313787| 9.321149|P
LIMITS | | | | -0.25| 0.75|
CpPhDf T1FH|0.3347042| 0.01|0.0005803761| 0.3323364| 0.3378296|P
LIMITS | | | | -0.3| 1.3|
CpPhDf T2FH|0.8568389| 0.01|0.0004924403| 0.8514404| 0.8596802|P
LIMITS | | | | -0.5| 0.5|
CpPhDf T1FL|0.08097682| 0.01|0.0002462202| 0.0769043| 0.08514404|P
LIMITS | | | | -0.3| 0.7|
CpPhDf T2FL|0.1656473| 0.01|0.0001582844| 0.1593018| 0.1730347|P
LIMITS | | | | 5.3| 5.7|
CpAttR T1FH|5.512507| 0.001|8.592058e-06| 5.512083| 5.512918|P
LIMITS | | | | 8.2| 8.6|
CpAttR T2FH|8.502135| 0.001|1.091869e-05| 8.500828| 8.503008|P
LIMITS | | | | 5.3| 5.7|
CpAttR T1FL|5.504779| 0.001|3.465524e-05| 5.504322| 5.505369|P
LIMITS | | | | 8.2| 8.6|
CpAttR T2FL|8.492384| 0.001|0.0001016879| 8.491552| 8.493785|P

User’s Guide I-65


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 65 of 70

5.2 Sample STD DEV Printout

BAKER HUGHES INTEQ - MPRRNT (77530R0113)

TechName: bill Facility: Houston


Sub Type: MPR Sub S/N: 8888 Test Type: Air Test
Tempertures: Max: -273.05 Min: -273.2
Date/Time: Starting: Fri Dec 04 13:17:18 1998
Ending: Fri Dec 04 13:22:18 1998
Comments: air hang test of Cement head
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SampNo, Time, PT1R2H, PT1R2L, PT2R1H, PT2R1L, PT2R2H, PT2R2L, PT3R1H,
PT3R1L, PT3R2H, PT3R2L, PT4R1H, PT4R1L, PT4R2H, PT4R2L,SampNo,ToolTmp, Time,
ART2RL,
29, Average, 107.4483, -90.94626, 109.8498, -94.25665, 110.0739,
-96.32941, 88.68826, -72.51239, 87.73399, -74.82697, 82.42645, -79.05817,
83.18584, -81.04129, 29, 34482.76, Average, 5.629691,
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
29, Variance, 1.455009e-07, 5.689587e-07, 2.098077e-07, 1.259897e-06, 4.424714e-07,
6.122014e-07, 4.355607e-08, 2.40982e-06, 2.759082e-07, 2.798038e-08, 5.444652e-07,
3.763827e-06, 2.409602e-07, 8.136502e-07, 29, 34482.76, Variance, 7.27778e-11,
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
29, Std Dev, 0.0003814459, 0.0007542935, 0.0004580476, 0.001122451, 0.0006651853,
0.000782433, 0.0002087009, 0.00155236, 0.0005252697, 0.0001672734, 0.0007378788,
0.001940059, 0.000490877, 0.0009020256, 29, 1000000, Std Dev, 8.530991e-06,
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
29, Max, 107.4518, -90.93384, 109.8578, -94.24622, 110.0775, -96.31714,
88.69263, -72.50977, 87.73682, -74.82239, 82.44141, -79.04663, 83.19397,
-81.03516, 29, 1000000, Max, 5.630282,
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
29, Min, 107.4408, -90.95032, 109.8413, -94.2627, 110.0665, -96.33362,
88.68164, -72.52075, 87.72583, -74.83337, 82.41394, -79.0686, 83.17749, -81.04614,
29, 1000000, Min, 5.628731,
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

5.3 Sample Error Report Log

BAKER HUGHES INTEQ - MPRRNT (77530R0113)

TechName: bill Facility: Houston


Sub Type: MPR Sub S/N: 8888 Test Type: Air Test
Tempertures: Max: -273.05 Min: -273.2
Date/Time: Starting: Fri Dec 04 13:17:18 1998
Ending: Fri Dec 04 13:22:18 1998
Comments: air hang test of Cement head
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

<<<<<< DATABASE RECORDS WITH ERRORS >>>>>>

PT1R1H, PT1R1L, PT1R2H, PT1R2L, PT2R1H, PT2R1L, PT2R2H, PT2R2L, PT3R1H,


PT3R1L, PT3R2H, PT3R2L, PT4R1H, PT4R1L, PT4R2H, PT4R2L,SampNo,ToolTmp, Time,
ART2RL,

I-66 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 66 of 70

5.4 Air Hang Sample Printout

BAKER HUGHES INTEQ - MPRRNT (77530R0115)

TechName: jimmy k. Facility: Lafayette


Sub Type: MPR Sub S/N: 8030 Test Type: Air Test
Tempertures: Max: 0 Min: 0
Date/Time: Starting: Thu Jan 27 12:44:45 1999
Ending: Thu Jan 27 12:54:45 1999
Comments: crane air test
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AIR HANG TEST DATA
PC Software P/N: 77530R0115
Resistivity S/N: 8030
Test Location: LAF
Number of Samples: 20
Test Date/Time: 1/27/1999 (MM/DD/YYYY) 12:54 (HH:MM)
Comments: Database Air Hang Data

P/N: 77392R0120 Status: 0000-hex AcqTime: 0.0s CPU: 8.3886080 MHz


-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 MHz Air Offsets | 400 kHz Air Offsets
Transmitter One Transmitter Two | Transmitter One Transmitter Two
PH R1 91.84050 PH R1 89.59206 | PH R1 179.75455 PH R1 -179.18335
PH R2 87.75590 PH R2 90.53082 | PH R2 -174.34404 PH R2 -173.13872
At R1 3.37169 At R1 8.59656 | At R1 6.27853 At R1 11.99709
At R2 8.68870 At R2 3.07232 | At R2 11.55516 At R2 6.49915
PD T1 4.08460 PD T2 0.93875 | PD T1 -5.90143 PD T2 6.04463
AD T1 5.31700 AD T2 5.52424 | AD T1 5.27663 AD T2 5.49793
CPT1T2 2.51168 CAT1T2 5.42062 | CPT1T2 0.07160 CAT1T2 5.38728

Transmitter Three Transmitter Four | Transmitter Three Transmitter Four


PH R1 70.92195 PH R1 74.23780 | PH R1 -109.20091 PH R1 -112.01689
PH R2 70.96706 PH R2 75.54633 | PH R2 -105.77171 PH R2 -108.28963
At R1 3.67290 At R1 11.52261 | At R1 3.10706 At R1 11.60769
At R2 11.85083 At R2 3.10744 | At R2 11.26942 At R2 3.22689
PD T3 -0.04510 PD T4 1.30853 | PD T3 -3.42920 PD T4 3.72726
AD T3 8.17793 AD T4 8.41517 | AD T3 8.16236 AD T4 8.38080
CPT3T4 0.63171 CAT3T4 8.29655 | CPT3T4 0.14903 CAT3T4 8.27158
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MPR K-TABLE DATA
Larry's Table
Acquisition Time: 1250 msecs IQModT1T2F1: 325
Frequencies: 2 IQModT1T2F2: 0
Transmitters: 4 IQModT3T4F1: 78
Clock Speed: 8.3886080MHz IQModT3T4F2: 120
Frequency #1: 2000000 Hz Gamma HVPS #1: 124 A/D 125.0V
Frequency #2: 400000 Hz Gamma HVPS #2: 124 A/D 125.0V
1st Transmitter: 1 Pulse Width Prd: 255
2nd Transmitter: 2 Read Checksum: B8F-hex
3rd Transmitter: 3 Calc Checksum: DE3-hex
4th Transmitter: 4 Gamma Serial #1: mpa8030
Gamma Serial #2: NotYetSet
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

User’s Guide I-67


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 67 of 70

BAKER HUGHES INTEQ - MPRRNT (77530R0115)

TechName: jimmy k. Facility: Lafayette


Sub Type: MPR Sub S/N: 8030 Test Type: Air Test
Tempertures: Max: 0 Min: 0
Date/Time: Starting: Thu Jan 27 12:44:45 1999
Ending: Thu Jan 27 12:54:45 1999
Comments: crane air test
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COMPENSATED AIR HANG RESULTS
Description | Average| StdDev| MIN| MAX| Pass/Fail
CpPhDiff LIMITS| | 0.01| -0.25| 0.75|
CpPhDiff X1 FH| 2.511677| 0.5157278| 0.2609253| 42.97577| FAIL
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CpPhDiff LIMITS| | 0.01| -0.3| 1.3|
CpPhDiff X2 FH| 0.6317139| 0.001260218| 0.6262207| 0.637207| PASS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CpPhDiff LIMITS| | 0.01| -0.5| 0.5|
CpPhDiff X1 FL| 0.05045038|0.0008622546| 0.04669189| 0.05493164| PASS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CpPhDiff LIMITS| | 0.01| -0.3| 0.7|
CpPhDiff X2 FL| 0.1490382|0.0007959273| 0.1428223| 0.151062| PASS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CpAttRat LIMITS| | 0.001| 5.3| 5.7|
CpAttRat X1 FH| 5.420624| 0.003850322| 5.403217| 5.725728| FAIL
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CpAttRat LIMITS| | 0.001| 8.2| 8.6|
CpAttRat X2 FH| 8.296549|7.699031e-05| 8.296118| 8.297068| PASS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CpAttRat LIMITS| | 0.001| 5.3| 5.7|
CpAttRat X1 FL| 5.387283|3.325576e-05| 5.386932| 5.387766| PASS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CpAttRat LIMITS| | 0.001| 8.2| 8.6|
CpAttRat X2 FL| 8.27158|0.0001490406| 8.27093| 8.272043| PASS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<END FILE>

I-68 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 68 of 70

5.5 General Data Calculations

5.5.1 There are numerous formulas used in calculating the resultant data
structures in the MPR/RNT/USR resistivity subs.

5.5.2 Utilizing the sample printout in Section 0, show how each calculated value
is arrived at. All calculations are the same in each of the sections, so we
will deal with the 2 MHz Air Offset section for this example.

2 MHz Air Offsets | 400 kHz Air Offsets


Transmitter One Transmitter Two | Transmitter One Transmitter Two
PH R1 91.84050 PH R1 89.59206| PH R1 179.75455 PH R1 -179.18335
PH R2 87.75590 PH R2 90.53082| PH R2 -174.34404 PH R2 -173.13872
At R1 3.37169 At R1 8.59656 | At R1 6.27853 At R1 11.99709
At R2 8.68870 At R2 3.07232 | At R 11.55516 At R2 6.49915
PD T1 4.08460 PD T2 0.93875 | PD T1 -5.90143 PD T2 6.04463
AD T1 5.31700 AD T2 5.52424 | AD T1 5.27663 AD T2 5.49793
CPT1T2 2.51168 CAT1T2 5.42062 | CPT1T2 0.07160 CAT1T2 5.38728

5.5.3 Under Transmitter one and two there are several entries.

5.5.4 PH R1 is the Phase data value gathered with respect from Transmitter one
to Receiver one at 2 MHz.

5.5.5 AT R1 is the Attenuation data value gathered with respect from


Transmitter one to Receiver one at 2 MHz.

5.5.6 The tool measures the phase and attenuation data and all other data derived
by calculation.

5.5.7 Looking at Transmitter one, we see value for PH R1 and PH R2. This data
is used to calculate the PD T1, that is the Phase difference of transmitter
one with respect to Receivers 1 and 2.

5.5.8 Therefore, the formulas are:


• PD T1 = (PH R1 - PH R2) = (87.75590 - 91.85050) = 4.048460
• AT T1 = (AT R2 - AT R1) = (8.68870-3.37169) = 5.31700

5.5.9 Transmitter two calculates the same way but in reverse.


• PD T2 = (PH R2 - PH R1) = (90.53082 - 89.59206) = 0.93875
• AT T2 = (AT R1 - AT R2) = (8.59656 - 3.07232) = 5.52424

5.5.10 A unique situation is demonstrated in the 400 kHz offset data. Looking at
the Phase data and calculating the Phase difference the result is as follows:
• PD T1 = (PH R1 - PH R2) = (179.75455 - -174.34404) = 354.09859

User’s Guide I-69


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 69 of 70

5.5.11 This poses a unique problem in that the sensor is designed to measure
results in the range of -180 to 180. This problem has been referred to as a
quadrature problem. To fix this, an addition check has to be performed on
the phased difference data (the actual phase data check is handled in the
downhole electronics).
• If -180 < Phase Difference then Phase difference = Phase Difference
+ 360 degrees
• If Phase Difference >180 then Phase difference = Phase Difference -
360 degrees
• PD T1 = (PH R1 - PH R2) = (179.75455 - (-174.34404)) = 354.09859
-360 = -5.90143

5.5.12 This will bring the resultant data back to a usable form.

5.5.13 From this data, compensated values are calculated,


• CPT1T2 = (PD T1 + PD T2) /2 = (4.048460 + 0.93875) / 2 = 2.51168
• CAT1T2 = (AT T1 + AT T2) /2 = (5.31700 + 5.52424) / 2 = 5.42062

5.5.14 Another value that is calculated in the apparent resistivity calculation


which is the apparent resistivity from the Phase and the attenuation. This is
calculated using the compensated values and applying them to a lookup
algorithm table. This is a very complex equation and will not be explained
here. This formula is used both here and in the surface decoding
equipment.

I-70 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

MPR/RNT Test Software User’s Guide No. 77530FU118 Rev. AA


Page 70 of 70

BAKER HUGHES INTEQ - MPRRNT (77530R0116)

TechName: kf Facility: Houston


Sub Type: MPR Sub S/N: 6218 Test Type: Air Test
Tempertures: Max: 0 Min: 0
Date/Time: Starting: Wed Feb 17 13:16:15 1999
Ending: Wed Feb 17 13:16:35 1999
Comments: mpr 6218 Sub Only Repair 2/17/99
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COMPENSATED AIR HANG RESULTS
Description | Average| StdDev| MIN| MAX| Pass/Fail
CpPhDiff LIMITS| | 0.01| -0.25| 0.75|
CpPhDiff X1 FH| 0.4314775|0.0003442591| 0.4284668| 0.4367065| PASS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CpPhDiff LIMITS| | 0.01| -0.3| 1.3|
CpPhDiff X2 FH| 1.060339|0.0007837388| 1.054688| 1.065674| PASS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CpPhDiff LIMITS| | 0.01| -0.5| 0.5|
CpPhDiff X1 FL| 0.1304626|0.0005713236| 0.1263428| 0.1345825| PASS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CpPhDiff LIMITS| | 0.01| -0.3| 0.7|
CpPhDiff X2 FL| 0.280838| 9.52206e-05| 0.2774048| 0.2828979| PASS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CpAttRat LIMITS| | 0.001| 5.3| 5.7|
CpAttRat X1 FH| 5.505929|4.170988e-05| 5.505383| 5.506255| PASS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CpAttRat LIMITS| | 0.001| 8.2| 8.6|
CpAttRat X2 FH| 8.488446|5.629816e-05| 8.487741| 8.489045| PASS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CpAttRat LIMITS| | 0.001| 5.3| 5.7|
CpAttRat X1 FL| 5.48992|1.464424e-05| 5.489375| 5.490435| PASS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CpAttRat LIMITS| | 0.001| 8.2| 8.6|
CpAttRat X2 FL| 8.461565|2.484281e-05| 8.461031| 8.461983| PASS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<END FILE>

User’s Guide I-71


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based) MPR/RNT Test Software

•Notes•

I-72 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
Index

Numerics BM 3-5, 7-4


BNR 3-10
2 MHz 1-1, 1-3, 1-24, 5-3, 5-4, breaking-out 8-8
D-5, G-4, G-8 buckets 3-13
3 conductor stab 4-5 Bus 3-13
400 kHz 1-3, 1-24, D-5, G-4, Busmon 3-5, 8-1, 8-11, C-1
G-8
C
A
catwalk 3-2, 4-4
Air Hang 4-3, 4-4, 5-10, 6-19, Catwalk test 5-1
7-4, 8-11, 8-12 CDP 6-11, 6-16, 6-21
alignment block 4-6 Centralizer 6-21
amplitude 1-3 clam shells 1-2
Amplitude Ratio G-10 Cleaning 6-20
anchor bolts 4-7 CNR 3-10
annular velocities 2-22 Communication 3-2
ANR 3-10 communication plug 5-7
antennas 1-2 compensated measurement 1-2
Apollo head 6-3 configuration file 3-8, 3-10
AT 1-1, 1-3 Connections 1-11
Attenuation 1-1 Cowbell 3-6, 4-6, 6-19
Crane Hang 5-1, 5-2, 8-5
B CRC 6-21
CRIM corrections G-3
backup data 8-13 Crush Ring 6-6, 6-9, 6-21
backup tool 8-2 CVA H-3
Base Air offsets 5-2, 5-8
Base Plate 6-4, 6-22
Battery Interrupt 4-2
D
battery life 3-13 DAS 2-7, 4-4, 6-18, A-3
Battery Life Calculations 2-18 Data Acquisition 1-12
battery usage A-1 DC-4 6-2, 6-8
Bendix 6-4, 6-22 DCC 8-2, 8-13
BHA 5-10, 6-20

User’s Guide Index-1


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)

density sub 8-4 G


dielectric effects 1-3
DirERR 3-14 GamERR 3-14
DNR 3-10 Gamma 8-12
Dogleg Severity 1-11 Gamma ray 3-13, 8-3
DOS utilities 3-5, 4-5 gap 6-9
DPDM A-1 GRAPICF 5-9
DPR 1-1 GZ axis 3-8
DrillByte 8-1, 8-15, G-1
D-Series 4-1, 5-6, 8-1, 8-11 H
DSeries 3-6, 4-2, 4-3, 4-5, 5-1,
6-18, 7-3, 7-4, 8-5, 8-11, 8-13 highside 3-7, 6-3
D-Series User’s Guide 5-1 Hole Sizes 1-11
Dual Battery A-2 Hydraulic Calculations 2-22
Dual PDM A-1
DV485 4-3, 5-8 I
Initial Delays 3-13
E Initialize Memories 4-4
eccentricity G-8 internal offset 3-7
Echo 1 8-5
EEJ 2-1, 2-2, 2-7, 4-1, 4-6, 6-3, L
6-9, 6-21, B-13
Lende Seal 8-9, 8-10
EEJ extractor tool 6-3
Length 1-11
ENR 3-10
Lift sub 8-6
Equivalent Stiffness 1-11
Loctite 272 H-13
ESB 2-6, 2-11, 6-1, 6-21
Log Data Sheet F-1
external offset 3-7
log quality 8-14
Logging with Memory 7-1
F Lost Circulation Material 1-11
FB 4-4, 5-10 Lower Flex Joint 1-15
Finger Protector 6-4, 6-22 Lubriplate 6-1, 8-7, 8-9
Flex sub 2-1, 2-12, 6-22
Flow detection 3-15 M
flow on 3-9
Flow sub 2-1 M30 3-2
flow-off 3-8 MAD Pass 6-14
Fluid Film H-1, H-11 making-up 8-8
Freon TF 4-6 Male Installation Tool E-1
Mandrel Stabilizer 1-11
maximum pulse height 2-22

Index-2 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)

memory data 8-13 P


memory files 4-1
Memory Module 3-6 PD 1-1, 1-3
memory only 7-1 PDM 3-5, A-2
memory size 3-14 phase 1-3
Memtobin.exe TL103 8-1 Phase Difference 5-3, G-10
MEMVIEW 8-5 Picking-up the Tool 8-6
Modified Tandem 2-20 pipe dope 6-2
monel 2-7 Pod 3-2, 4-2, 5-2, 5-7, 8-11
Monel Collar 1-15 Poll 3-2, 3-6, 4-2, 5-2, 5-6, 7-3,
MPR 1-3, 2-1, 3-1, 3-13, 5-1, 8-11, D-1
5-10, 8-11 PowerComms 3-2, 3-5, 4-2, 4-3,
MPRCALC 3.03 8-1 5-2, 5-8, 6-19, 7-4, 8-2, 8-11,
MprErr 3-14 8-13
MPRRes.TAB 8-1 Pressure 1-11
MPRTEST 4-2, D-1, G-10 Pressure Barrel E-3
MT Bus 8-10 primary tool 8-2
MTC 8-10 probe 2-7, 6-22
Mud Box 3-1 Program SWWP 3-15
mud correction 8-4 Pulsation Dampner 1-11
Mud Filter 1-12 pulser 3-7
Mud Flow Range 1-11
mud motor 8-13 R
Mud Pumps 1-12
MVA H-2 RAW 3-10
raw data G-3
reset pattern 4-2
N Rmud 1-3
Navi-MPR 4-1, 4-5, 5-2, 6-1 ROD 3-1, 4-4
NC-46 8-6 roll test 3-6
NC-61 8-6 RPM 1-12
nodes 8-4 Rxo 1-3
Non-I.S. system 2-13
S
O Sand Content 1-12
offline 8-13 SAVE Configuration 3-15
off-line computer 5-8 SDAS 3-2, 3-6, 3-7, 3-8, 4-1, 5-6
on-line computer 3-7 SDAS offset 2-11
Operating Specifications 1-21 sensor offset 2-12
OrientXPress 2-4, 6-13 Sensor Offset Calculations 2-8
Sensor to Bit Offsets 8-6

User’s Guide Index-3


N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999 Confidential
MPR (Probe & Collar Based)

SGAM 4-1 temperature characterization 1-1


shop air values 5-3 Tool OD 1-11
Slip-a-Vator 6-3, 6-4, H-3 Tool Setup 2-1
Spacer 6-21 Tool Specifications 1-16
Split Ring Centralizer 6-21 Tool Verification 3-6, 4-4
Split Rings 6-8 ToolDump 3-5
Splitphase 3-9 Tooltest 3-5, 5-1, 8-1, 8-2, 8-4,
spool file G-2 D-1
SRIG 2-13, 6-1, 6-2, 6-16, 8-2, Transmitter 1 5-3
8-6, 8-12 transmitters 1-3
Stab Connector E-4
status bits 7-1 U
SUIT 3-5, 3-8, 3-9, 4-2, 5-6, 7-2,
7-3, 8-1, 8-2, 8-6, 8-15, 8-17 UP 2-22, B-5, B-13, H-2
SUIT 410 3-2, 7-2 Upper Flex Joint 1-15
SWWP 4-4, 5-8, 8-11, 8-15 USMPR 2-18, 4-3, 5-8, 6-16,
SWWP410 2-18, 3-8 B-13
SWWP500 2-18, 3-9 Utilities Menu 4-4, 5-10
SWWP-DAS 3-2, 3-9, 4-3, 5-8
SWWP-DAS Users Guide 3-8 V
verification 5-2, 8-15
T
tandem 2-6 W
tap test 4-6, 6-5
Telemetry Type 1-12 WD-40 H-11
Temperature 1-11 Weight 1-11

Index-4 Baker Hughes INTEQ


Confidential N750-500-043 Rev. D / Dec. 1999

You might also like